Contents
AV RECEIVER
Safety Information and Introduction ............2
Table of Contents...........................................5
Connections .................................................11
Turning On & Basic Operations..................19
Advanced Operations ..................................43
Controlling Other Components...................66
Appendix.......................................................73
HT-R791
Instruction Manual
Speaker Package
Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
Precautions
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without
the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your
Onkyo dealer.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the
like.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over
with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth
dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and
water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a
clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners,
alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because they may
damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are
wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside
this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer.
8. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally
bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a
long time, because they may leave marks on the
case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after
prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not
work properly the next time you turn it on, so be sure
to use it occasionally.
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION
CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make
sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage
requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g., AC
230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is
readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA
CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003
DU CANADA.
For models with [POWER] button, or with both
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF mode
does not fully disconnect from the mains. If you do not
intend to use the unit for an extended period, remove
the power cord from the AC outlet.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an
extended period, remove the power cord from the AC
outlet.
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
■ Aiming the remote controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor, as shown below.
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 18)
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
AM loop antenna (➔ page 18)
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 33)
Remote controller (RC-834M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
Quick Start Guide
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the
same regardless of color.
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
■ Installing the batteries
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will
enable you to obtain optimum performance and
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
Batteries (AA/R6)
Note
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing the
batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage
from leakage or corrosion.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Playback......................................................................22
Playing the Connected Component..........................22
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....23
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................24
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB...............................24
Playing a USB Device...............................................25
Listening to vTuner Internet Radio............................26
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................27
Changing the Icon Layout
on the Network Service Screen..............................27
Playing Music Files on a Server ...............................28
Remote Playback......................................................29
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................30
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup.........................32
Using the Listening Modes .......................................35
Using the Home Menu..............................................40
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................41
Setting the Display Brightness..................................41
Displaying Source Information..................................41
Changing the Input Display.......................................41
Using the Music Optimizer........................................42
Muting the AV Receiver............................................42
Using Headphones ...................................................42
Table of Contents
Controlling Other Components
iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock.................... 66
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 66
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 67
Controlling Other Components................................. 68
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 68
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 68
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 69
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 69
Remote Control Codes
for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 70
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 70
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 70
Controlling Other Components................................. 70
Safety Information and Introduction
Important Safety Instructions......................................2
Precautions ...................................................................3
Supplied Accessories...................................................4
Table of Contents..........................................................5
Features.........................................................................6
Front & Rear Panels......................................................7
Front Panel..................................................................7
Rear Panel ..................................................................9
Remote Controller.......................................................10
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................10
Appendix
Connections
Troubleshooting......................................................... 73
Firmware Update ........................................................ 79
Connection Tips and Video Signal Path .................. 83
Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player,
or Recorder .............................................................. 86
About HDMI................................................................. 88
Network/USB Features............................................... 89
License and Trademark Information ........................ 92
Specifications............................................................. 93
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................11
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................11
About AV Connections..............................................14
Connecting Components with HDMI.........................15
Connecting Your Components..................................16
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................17
Connecting the Antennas..........................................18
Connecting the Power Cord......................................18
Advanced Operations
On-screen Setup.........................................................43
Using the Quick Setup..............................................43
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup..................44
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................46
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator ...................47
Setup menu items.....................................................47
Input/Output Assign ..................................................48
Speaker Setup..........................................................50
Audio Adjust..............................................................52
Source Setup............................................................53
Listening Mode Preset..............................................58
Hardware Setup........................................................59
Remote Controller Setup ..........................................63
Lock Setup................................................................63
Zone 2..........................................................................64
Making Zone 2 Connections.....................................64
Controlling Zone 2 Components...............................65
Turning On & Basic Operations
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY (➔ page 73).
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................19
Turning On ................................................................19
Turning Off ................................................................19
Initial Setup..................................................................20
Selecting the Language
for the Onscreen Setup Menus...............................20
Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup.......................................20
Remote Mode Setup.................................................21
Network Connection..................................................21
Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................21
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Connections
Features
• 7 HDMI Inputs and 1 Output
Amplifier
• Onkyo pfor System Control
• 4 Digital Inputs (2 Optical/2 Coaxial)
• Component Video Switching (1 Input/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
• Powered Zone 2
• 80 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High
Power Transformer
• Internet Radio Connectivity
Processing
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices and
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital
Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
®
®
iPod /iPhone models (Enables Display of Album
Artwork)
Miscellaneous
• 40 FM/AM Presets
®
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz
• Audyssey 2EQ to correct room acoustic problems
®
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction
®
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal
listening level and dynamic range
• Direct Mode
• Crossover Adjustment
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
• Auto Standby Function
• On-Screen Display via HDMI
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
a
b c
d e
f g h i j k l
m
n o
p
q
u
r
s t
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a 8ON/STANDBY button (19)
b ZONE 2, OFF buttons (65)
c Remote control sensor (4)
d Display (8)
l RETURN button
m MASTER VOLUME control (22)
o PHONES jack (42)
p TONE and Tone Level buttons (44)
e LISTENING MODE buttons (35)
f DIMMER button (41)
s USB port (16)
g MEMORY button (31)
h TUNING MODE button (30)
i DISPLAY button (41)
t SETUP MIC jack (33)
j SETUP button (46)
k TUNING q/w(30), PRESET e/r(31), cursor and
ENTER buttons
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Display
s
ab c d
e
f g
h i
j k l m j d
n
o p q
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
j Input indicators (84)
HDMI indicator (60)
DIGITAL indicator
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (65)
b 3D indicator
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected.
k ARC indicator (61)
l USB indicator (24, 25)
c Headphone indicator (42)
d 1, 3and cursor indicators (24)
e Listening mode and format indicators (35)
f Audyssey indicator (32, 53)
Dynamic EQ indicator (54)
Dynamic Vol indicator (54)
g M.Opt indicator (42, 45)
h Tuning indicators
m NET indicator (26 to 29, 62)
n Message area
p Channel/Unit indicators
Hz indicator
m/ft indicator
AUTO indicator (30)
TUNED indicator (30)
q ASb indicator (61)
FM STEREO indicator (30)
i MUTING indicator (42)
En-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Rear Panel
f
a
b c d
e
g
h
i
jkl
a DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks
c ETHERNET port
i Composite video and analog audio jacks
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, GAME IN, PC IN,
TV/CD IN)
j ZONE 2 LINE OUT jacks
k SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks
l MONITOR OUT V jack
d FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal
e HDMI IN and HDMI OUT jacks
f SPEAKERS terminals
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND, SURROUND
BACK or FRONT HIGH, ZONE 2)
See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection
(➔ pages 11 to 18).
g Power cord
h u REMOTE CONTROL jack
En-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVERto select
Receiver mode.
Remote Controller
You can also use the remote controller to control
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and
other components.
Controlling the AV Receiver
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more
details (➔ page 69).
a
b
*1
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a 8RECEIVER button (19)
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons (22)
g
i
e Listening Mode buttons (35)
f DIMMER button (41)
d
g MUTING button (42)
ac
h DISPLAY button (41)
j
k
d
i VOL q/wbutton (22)
j RETURN button
k HOME button (40)
l SLEEP button (41)
e
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press AM or FM (or
RECEIVER).
e
a q/wbuttons (30)
b D.TUN button (30)
c DISPLAY button
d CH +/– button (31)
e Number buttons (30)
bf
l
*1
To control a component, you must first enter the remote
control code.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details
(➔ page 69).
En-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the AV
Receiver
Surround
right
Surround
left
Connecting Your Speakers
Speaker Configuration
The following table indicates the channels you should use
depending on the number of speakers that you have.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid
bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system, you need
to set the speaker settings automatically (➔ page 32) or
manually (➔ page 50).
Number of speakers
Front speakers
2 3 4 5 6 7 7
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Center speaker
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Surround speakers
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Surround back/
Front high
left
Front right
Front left
Center
Surround back/
Front high
right
*1*2
Surround back speaker
✔
✔
✔
*2
Surround back speakers
*2
Front high speakers
■ Screw-type speaker terminals
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the ends
of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as
shown.
■ Push-type speaker terminals
Strip 3/8" to 1/2" (10 to 12 mm) of insulation from the ends
of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as
shown.
*1
*2
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to
Front high and surround back speakers cannot be used at the
same time.
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)
3/8" to 1/2"(10 to 12 mm)
Connecting the Speaker Cables
The following illustration shows how to connect the
speakers to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one
surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND
BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals.
■ Banana Plugs
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center
hole of the speaker terminal.
Tip
• You can specify whether surround back or front high speakers are
connected in the “Speaker Configuration” menu (➔ page 50) or
during Audyssey 2EQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup
(➔ page 32).
En-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
Connecting the Speaker Cables
The speaker terminals are color-coded for identification
purpose.
Speaker
Color
White
Red
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Green
Blue
Surround left
Surround right
Gray
Brown
Tan
Surround back left, Front high left
Surround back right, Front high right
Speaker Connection Precautions
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of between
6 and 16 ohms. If you use speakers with a lower
impedance, and use the amplifier at high volume levels
for a long period of time, the built-in amp protection
circuit may be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other
words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–)
terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may
damage the AV receiver.
En-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Using Powered Subwoofers
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
Powered subwoofer
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing
a movie or some music with good bass, experiment by
placing your subwoofer at various positions within the
room, and choose the one that provides the most satisfying
results.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.
Tip
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an external
amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the
amplifier.
En-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Analog audio (RCA)
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
AV Cables and Jacks
About AV Connections
■ HDMI
Connecting AV components
White
Red
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
a
HDMI cable
: Video & Audio
TV, projector, etc.
*1
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4 and
192 kHz are also supported.
■ Component video
AV receiver
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color
difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best picture
quality (some TV manufacturers label their component
video sockets slightly differently).
Note
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type covers
that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it’s
removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Green
Blue
Red
Y
Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player
PB
PR
Caution
Game console
: Audio
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight
when inserting and removing.
Other cables
: Video
■ Composite video
TV, projector, etc.
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs, and
other video equipment.
AV receiver
Yellow
■ Optical digital audio
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
*1
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player
quality is the same as coaxial.
Game console
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and
double-checked all AV connections.
■ Coaxial digital audio
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
*1
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections
can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio
and video cables away from power
cords and speaker cables.
Right!
quality is the same as optical.
Orange
Wrong!
En-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting Components with HDMI
Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.
Personal computer
Game console
TV, projector, etc.
*
If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return Channel (ARC), you
need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI
cable to the AV receiver.
When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen
on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI
component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV power is off
or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no
sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off.
Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The
default input assignments are shown below.
Note
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is output
despite following the above-mentioned procedure, set your Blu-
ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to PCM.
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 48).
*
Jack
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
OUT
Components
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.
Game console
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
■ Audio Return Channel (ARC) function
The Audio Return Channel (ARC) function enables an
HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT
on the AV receiver.
• This function can be used when:
– Your TV is ARC capable, and
– The TV/CD input selector is selected, and
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”(➔ page 60), and
– “Audio Return Channel” is set to “Auto” (➔ page 61).
Personal computer
Other components
Other components
Other components
TV, projector, etc.
See also:
• “Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” (➔ page 83)
• “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder”
(➔ page 86)
• “About HDMI” (➔ page 88)
Tip
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”
(➔ page 60) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
En-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Note
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display
when changing settings.
Connecting Your Components
A B C
*1
When the USB input is selected, you can input video signals
from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack. Video signals input from
AUX INPUT VIDEO will be output from the MONITOR
OUT and HDMI output jacks.
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on
your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played
through the AV receiver in this way
Connect a turntable (MM) that has a phono preamp built-in. If
your turntable (MM) doesn’t have it, you’ll need a
commercially available phono preamp.
*2
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 49).
No. Jack/Port
Components
AUX INPUT
A
VIDEO
Camcorder, etc
AUDIO L/R
If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll
need a commercially available MC head amp or MC
transformer as well as a phono preamp. See your turntable’s
manual for details.
USB, AUX INPUT
iPod/iPhone (video
playback)
B
C
D
*1
VIDEO
*2
USB
iPod/iPhone, MP3 player,
USB flash drive
DTS. (To listen in Zone 2 as well, use D and G.)
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 1 (GAME)
OPTICAL 2 (TV/CD)
Game consoles
TV, CD player
✔
✔
✔
✔
• With connection G, you can enjoy audio from external
components while you are in Zone 2.
COAXIAL 1 (BD/DVD) Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
• With connection G, if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs, be
sure to connect the main stereo.
COAXIAL 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite/cable set-top box,
RI dock, etc.
D
E F
G
COMPONENT VIDEO
E
IN (CBL/SAT)
Satellite/cable set-top box,
RI dock, etc.
✔
OUT
TV, projector, etc.
Router
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
BD/DVD IN
CBL/SAT IN
F
G
TV, projector, etc.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
Satellite/cable set-top box,
etc.
GAME IN
PC IN
Game console, RI dock
Personal computer
TV/CD IN
TV, CD player, cassette
tape deck, MD, CD-R,
Turntable , RI dock
*3
Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The
default input assignments are shown below. See
“Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” for more
information (➔ page 83).
En-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting Onkyo RI Components
Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected
with an analog audio cable (connection G in the
1
hookup examples) (➔ page 16).
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).
2
3
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck,
change the Input Display (➔ page 41).
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the following
special functions:
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
■ System On/Auto Power On
e.g., cassette tape deck
When you start playback on a component connected via
u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV
receiver will automatically turn on and select that
component as the input source.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
■ Direct Change
RI Dock
When playback is started on a component connected via
u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
(➔ page 70).
Note
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are supplied
■ Remote Control
with Onkyo components.
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect either
one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting
additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting other
manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer to the
manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and Direct
Change ufunctions do not work.
En-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the Antennas
Connecting the Power Cord
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use
the tuner.
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
1
Note
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge
that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same
circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different
branch circuit.
Insert the plug fully into the jack.
Push.
Insert wire.
Release.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Caution
• Be careful not to injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
Thumbtacks, etc.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)
Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible
reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM
antenna.
En-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
Turning On
Turning On/Off the AV
Receiver
(Initial Setup)
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to
help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for
the very first time. These settings only need to be made
once. See “Initial Setup” for details (➔ page 20).
1
or
8ON/STANDBY
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the
remote controller.
■ If the “Firmware Update Available” window
appears.
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.
When a new version of the firmware is available, the
notification window “Firmware Update Available”
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV
receiver is connected to your home network
(➔ page 89). To perform the firmware update, follow
the instructions on screen.
Turning Off
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
1
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the
remote controller.
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the options.
`Update Now:
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver,
always turn down the volume before you turn it off.
Starts the firmware update.
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 79).
`Remind me Later:
Tip
The update notification will pop up again the next
time you turn the AV receiver on.
`Never Remind me:
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the
status of settings (➔ page 47).
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto Standby”
8RECEIVER
(➔ page 61).
Disables the automatic update notification.
Tip
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in
“Update Notice” (➔ page 62).
RECEIVER
En-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Selecting the Language for the
Onscreen Setup Menus
Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup
Initial Setup
This section explains the settings that we recommend you
to make before using the AV receiver for the very first
time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time use to let
you perform those settings.
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.
This step determines the language used for the onscreen
(➔ page 59).
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and
1
then press ENTER.
`Do it Now:
Tip
The automatic speaker setup is performed
following instructions on screen. Refer to step 2
of “Using the Automatic Speaker Setup”
(➔ page 32). When this setting is complete, the
setup wizard continues to “Source Connection”.
`Do it Later:
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT.
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the initial
setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu
(➔ page 62).
After selecting the language for on-screen setup menus, a
welcome screen is displayed.
Skips this setting.
Initial Setup
Press ENTER and continue to “Source
Connection”.
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
1st Step : Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup
2nd Step : Source Connection
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
4th Step : Network Connection
Yes
No
HOME Exit
Use q/won the AV receiver or remote controller to
1
select one of the following options, and then press
ENTER.
`Yes:
Continues to “Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup”.
`No:
Skips the settings and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the
Initial Setup”. You can always restart the initial
setup by selecting “Initial Setup” in the
“Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 62).
En-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Source Connection
Remote Mode Setup
Network Connection
This step checks the connection of source components.
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for the
components you want to operate.
This step checks your network connection.
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and
1
1
then press ENTER.
`Yes, Continue:
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
`Yes:
1
then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Performs the checkings.
Performs the remote control code input. Refer to
step 5 of “Looking up for Remote Control
Codes” (➔ page 68).
`No, Skip:
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Remote Mode
Setup”.
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.
Note
`No, Skip:
Select the input selector for which you want to
• If you use both wired and wireless network connections, the
wireless will take priority.
For further details, see the instruction manual provided with
your wireless device.
2
Skips this step and continues to “Network
Connection”.
The picture of the corresponding source should appear
on screen with a verification prompt.
When you’re finished, select one of the following
options and press ENTER.
`Yes, Done:
The setup wizard continues to “Network
Connection”.
`No, not yet:
2
Follow the instructions on screen to perform the
network checking.
The checking is complete when the message
“Successfully connected.” appears at the middle of
the screen. Press ENTER to terminate the initial
setup.
2
3
`Yes:
Confirms that the source is properly displayed.
`No:
You can enter other remote control codes.
Displays an error report. Follow the
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source.
If an error message appears, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
3
`Retry:
Performs the checking again.
`No, Do it Later:
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and
4
then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.
The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the
Initial Setup”.
Returns to step 2.
`No, Done Checking:
The setup wizard continues to “Remote Mode
Setup”.
Terminating the Initial Setup
This step ends the initial setup process.
Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in
1
the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 62).
En-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Operating on the AV receiver
Playing the Connected Component
Playback
Input selector buttons
LISTENING MODE MASTER VOLUME
■ Operating with the remote controller
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display
when changing settings.
RECEIVER
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller, unless otherwise specified.
Use the input selector buttons to select the input
source.
1
Start playback on the source component.
Listening mode buttons
2
3
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME
control.
Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT
SELECTOR button.
1
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
4
Start playback on the source component.
2
See also:
• “Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB” (➔ page 24)
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 25)
• “Listening to vTuner Internet Radio” (➔ page 26)
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 27)
• “Playing Music Files on a Server” (➔ page 28)
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 29)
■ Screen Saver
If there is no video signal on the current input source and
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Tip
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 30)
• “iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock”
(➔ page 66)
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 59).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is
operated.
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 68)
To adjust the volume, use VOL q/w.
3
4
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See also:
• “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ page 35)
En-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
TOP MENU
a
b
n
o
2
Controlling Contents of USB or
Network Devices
This button displays the top menu for each media or service.
This button stops playback.
q/wand ENTER
MODE
These buttons navigate through the menus.
You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended Mode
during iPod/iPhone playback.
Press USB or NET first.
e/r
RANDOM
This button performs random playback.
p
This button cycles through pages.
PLAYLIST e/r
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects
playlists.
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
modes.
c
d
1
This button starts playback.
Tip
7
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
h
Note
e
f
g
5
i
j
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and
media used for playback.
This button fast-reverses the current song.
3
a
b
This button pauses playback.
SEARCH
k
l
m
n
You can toggle between the playback screen and the list
screen during playback.
c
d
e
f
g
DISPLAY
h
This button switches between song information during
playback.
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to
the playback screen.
o
p
q
ALBUM +/–
i
j
k
l
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects albums.
MENU
This button displays the menu of Internet radio services.
RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.
m
6
This button selects the next song.
En-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended
Mode (Music) or Extended Mode (Video).
Understanding Icons on the Display
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB
3
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receiver’s display during media playback.
A list of your iPod/iPhone model’s contents appears.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT.
Tip
Icon
Description
• If you want to operate using the iPod/iPhone or the remote
controller, press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard
mode.
• When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver
remembers the current mode. This means that if you
disconnect when in Extended Mode (Music), the AV
receiver will start in Extended Mode (Music) the next time
you connect the iPod/iPhone.
This section explains how to play music/video files on the
iPod/iPhone.
Compatible iPod/iPhone models
Folder
Track
Made for:
Playback
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation), iPod classic,
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation),
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
Pause
Use q/wto select a folder, and then press ENTER to
• You can also use the q/w, ENTER and TUNING MODE
buttons on the front panel. TUNING MODE allows you to
switch modes.
4
5
Press USB to select the “USB” input.
Fast Forward
Fast Reverse
Artist
open it.
1
Tip
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting “USB” in the
Home menu.
Connect the USB cable that comes with the
iPod/iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV
receiver.
While reading the contents of your iPod/iPhone, the
message “Connecting...” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the iPod/iPhone.
2
Use q/wto select a music/video file, and press
Album
ENTER or 1to start playback.
Repeat One Track
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
Repeat
Note
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port, no sound will
be output from the headphones jack.
Tip
• When connecting your iPod/iPhone with a USB cable, we
recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc.
Shuffle
Shuffle Album (iPod/iPhone)
En-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Extended Mode (Music) Control
Playing a USB Device
The music content information is displayed (lists are
displayed), and you can control the music content while
looking at the screen.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT.
Top screen list:
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Shuffle Songs, Now Playing.
This section explains how to play music files from a USB
device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).
See also:
Note
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 89).
input from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s
front panel.
Press USB to select the “USB” input.
1
2
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
Extended Mode (Video) control
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the USB device.
The video content information is displayed (lists are
looking at the screen.
Press ENTER.
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a
3
Top screen list:
Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts,
Rentals.
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a music file, and press ENTER or
4
Note
1to start playback.
• To view the video contents of your iPod/iPhone, connect it to the
USB port and AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s
front panel, using the official Apple Composite AV Cable.
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation, the
displayed items may vary and the support for Extended Mode
(Video) is not guaranteed.
Note
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.
Standard Mode Control
The content information is not displayed, but can be
operated using the iPod/iPhone or the remote controller.
En-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to
Favorites
Listening to vTuner Internet Radio
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
radio stations (programs) from the vTuner Internet
Radio.
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 89). The on-screen menus appear
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT.
Adding to My Favorites
The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring
radio stations from all over the world.
You can search for stations by categories such as genre or
location. The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service.
The selected program will be added to “My Favorites”
on the network service screen, which appears when
pressing NET on the remote controller.
1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a
station is playing.
Press NET.
1
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and press
The network service screen appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
ENTER.
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.
Tip
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.
Adding to vTuner Internet Radio’s Favorites
Select “vTuner Internet Radio” and press ENTER to
display the “Favorites” folder that appears on the same
screen as “Stations By Genre”, “Stations By
Location”, etc. This is where your favorite Internet radio
bookmarks will be stored.
To register your favorite stations using a personal
computer, you need to connect your PC to the same
network as the AV receiver. Enter the ID# (MAC
address) of your unit on the http://onkyo.vtuner.com/.
You can then register your favorite radio programs. The
ID# is shown at the bottom of the “vTuner Internet
Radio” top menu, and the AV receiver’s MAC address
is shown on “Network” of the Setup menu
Use q/w/e/rto select “vTuner Internet Radio”
2
and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a program and then press
3
ENTER.
Playback starts.
My Music
0 : 11
Great Artist
My Favorite
(➔ page 62).
Tip
During playback, press MENU on the remote controller,
select “Stations like this” and press ENTER.
En-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.
The Internet radio station is then added to “My
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press NET,
and then select “My Favorites” on the network
service screen. A list of registered Internet radio
stations appears. Select the one that you saved and
press ENTER.
Registering Other Internet Radio
Changing the Icon Layout on the
Network Service Screen
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 89). The on-screen menus appear
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching their
positions on the network service screen.
Press NET.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by the
Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to some
stations.
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must register
your station in “My Favorites” of the network service
screen, as described below.
1
The network service screen appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
Tip
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My Favorites”,
select an empty slot in the list and press MENU. Then, select
“Create New Station” and press ENTER.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen. Use that
keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL respectively, and
then press ENTER.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.
Note
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”, press
MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing.
Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My Favorites” and press
ENTER. You can also delete stations from the Web Setup.
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station and
press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this station” and
press ENTER.
Use q/w/e/rto select an icon to move, and then
destination, and then press ENTER.
The icons switch positions and the message
“Completed!” appears.
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See the
separate instructions for more information.
3
press ENTER.
Use q/w/e/rto select another icon as the
4
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify your
IP address (➔ page 62).
1
Take a note of the IP address.
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.
On your computer, start your web browser.
If you press RETURN, the “Custom Mode” process
will be cancelled or it will go back one step.
2
3
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s
Internet address (URL) field.
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also enter
the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File” menu.
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your
Internet browser (Web Setup).
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the
Internet radio station’s name and URL.
4
En-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Use q/wto select an item, and then press ENTER or
Playing Music Files on a Server
5
1to start playback.
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 89). The on-screen menus appear
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT.
Start Windows Media Player 11.
1
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or media server through the AV receiver (Server
Playback).
My favorite song 1
0 : 11
Artist name
My favorite album
On the “Library” menu, select “Media Sharing”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.
Select the “Share my media” check box, and then
click “OK”.
A list of the supported devices appears.
3
Start your computer or media server.
1
2
Note
Press NET.
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click
“Allow”.
The corresponding icon will be checked.
The network service screen appears. The NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
work.
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV receiver connections.
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
Tip
5
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.
You can now play the music files in your Windows
Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver.
Use q/w/e/rto select “DLNA”, and press ENTER.
3
Tip
Tip
• To go back to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from
the Microsoft web site.
Use q/wto select a server, and then press ENTER.
4
The menu is displayed according to the server
functions.
Note
• The search function does not work with media servers
which do not support this function.
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be
accessed from the AV receiver.
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the
AV receiver may not able to access the content. See the
instruction manual of the media server.
En-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Adjusting the Volume.
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume
bar in the “Remote playback” window. The default
maximum volume level is 64. If you wish to change
this, enter the value from the Web Setup in your
browser. Refer to step 3 of “Registering Other Internet
Radio” for details (➔ page 27).
The volume value of the remote window and the
volume value of the AV receiver may not always
match.
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote
playback” window.
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Windows
Media Player 12 library.
Remote Playback
5
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 89). The on-screen menus appear
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT.
Tip
Remote Playback means you can play the music files
stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV
receiver by operating the controller device in the home
network.
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote control
of my Player...” is checked.
Using Remote Playback
Windows Media Player 12 Setup
Turn on the AV receiver.
1
2
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your personal computer.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first configure
Windows Media Player 12.
Note
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following cases:
– Network services are being used.
– Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod/iPhone.
– Zones are turned on.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
1
2
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
The right-click menu appears.
3
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Tip
• For selecting another media server, select the desired media
server from the “Other Libraries” menu on Windows Media
Player 12.
Tip
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.
4
The “Play to” window appears and playback on the
AV receiver starts. Operations during remote playback
can be made from the “Play to” window of Windows 7
on your personal computer.
A playback screen will be displayed on the connected
TV.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
3
On the “Media streaming options”, select the AV
4
receiver and confirm that it is set to “Allow”.
En-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Manual tuning mode
Tuning into Radio Stations
Listening to AM/FM Radio
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
■ Auto tuning mode
This section describes the procedure of using the
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
goes off on the AV receiver’s display.
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
lights on the AV receiver’s display.
1
Press and hold TUNING q/w.
2
Using the Tuner
Press TUNING q/w.
The frequency stops changing when you release the
button.
2
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for
quick selection.
Searching stops when a station is found.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency
one step at a time.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator lights as shown.
You can also change the frequency steps (➔ page 59).
Press AM or FM to select either “AM” or “FM”.
In this example, FM has been selected.
1
■ Tuning into stations by frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering
the appropriate frequency.
TUNED
AUTO
Band
Frequency
On the remote controller, press AM or FM to select
“AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.
1
FM STEREO
(Actual display depends on the country.)
Tip
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter
2
the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5 or 8,
7, 5, 0.
If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry
after 8 seconds.
En-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Deleting Presets
Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations as presets.
Select the preset that you want to delete.
See the previous section.
1
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE.
The preset is deleted and its number disappears from
the AV receiver’s display.
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to store
as a preset.
See the previous section.
2
1
Press MEMORY.
The preset number flashes.
2
(Actual display depends on the country.)
While the preset number is flashing (about 8
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset from
1 through 40.
Press MEMORY again to store the station or
4
channel.
The station or channel is stored and the preset number
stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM/FM
radio stations.
■ Selecting Presets
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
Tip
• You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to
select a preset directly.
En-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Measurement procedure
Note
Using Basic Functions
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio
Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers,
or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use)
or place it away from all audio electronics.
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker
as Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup runs.
• Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot be
performed while a pair of headphones is connected.
To create a listening environment in your home theater that
all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey 2EQ takes measurements
at up to three positions within the listening area. Position
the microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the
microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a
tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your hand during
measurements as this will produce inaccurate results.
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup
®
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Audyssey 2EQ
automatically determines the number of speakers
connected, their size for purposes of bass management,
optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer (if
present), and distances from the primary listening position.
Audyssey 2EQ then removes the distortion caused by room
acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems over the
listening area in both the frequency and time domain. The
result is clear, well-balanced sound for everyone.
a First measurement position
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey 2EQ uses the measurements from this
position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity,
and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
®
Audyssey 2EQ can be used with Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume (➔ page 54).
Before using this function, connect and position all of your
speakers.
Audyssey 2EQ offers two ways of measuring: the
“Audyssey Quick Start” and “Audyssey 2EQ Full
Calibration”.
b Second measurement position
The right side of the listening area.
c Third measurement position
The left side of the listening area.
The distances from position ato band ato cmust be
at least 1 meter (3.3 ft.).
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement from one
position to perform the speaker setting only.
• “Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration” uses the
measurement from three positions to correct room
response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better the
listening environment will become. We recommend using
listening environment.
TV
c ab
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes
about 10 minutes.
Total measurement time varies depending on the number
of speakers.
: Listening area
a to c: Listening position
En-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver
is connected.
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or
“Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration”, and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select an option, and then press ENTER.
1
2
4
5
8
2EQ: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
-- Review Speaker Configuration --
Subwoofer
Front
Yes
100Hz
40Hz
Press ENTER.
Note
®
Center
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
• Before plugging the Speaker setup microphone to perform
Automatic Speaker Setup, please make sure that all your
connected speakers and subwoofers produce sound.
Surround
100Hz
None
120Hz
2ch
starts.
Front High
Surround Back
Surround Back Ch
Test tones are played through each speaker as
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
runs. This process takes a few minutes. Please refrain
from talking during measurements and do not stand
between speakers and the microphone.
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup.
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go to
step 8.
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main
Listening Position a, and connect it to the SETUP
MIC jack.
Save
Cancel
The options are:
`Save:
SETUP MIC jack
Save the calculated settings and exit
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
`Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.
Place the speaker setup microphone at the next
position, and then press ENTER.
Audyssey 2EQ performs more measurements. This
takes a few minutes.
6
7
Speaker setup microphone
Tip
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by
using e/r.
The speaker setting menu appears.
When prompted, repeat step 6.
Note
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto change
the setting.
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected
to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to other video
outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing
settings.
9
After the results of Audyssey 2EQ have been saved,
the menu will display the “Audyssey” (➔ page 53),
“Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 54), “Dynamic Volume”
(➔ page 54) settings.
When you’ve finished making the settings, press
ENTER.
3
Note
2EQ: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.
Powered Zone 2
Surround Back/Front High
No
Surround Back
Press ENTER.
Perform the “Speaker Setup” according to your
speaker configuration:
– Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 50)
10
11
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.
– Surround Back/Front High (➔ page 50)
En-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Changing the Speaker Setup Manually
Error Messages
Note
• You can cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup at any point in this procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during Audyssey 2EQ
Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
when Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts.
• Changes to the room after Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction
and Speaker Setup again, as room EQ characteristics may have
changed.
®
You can manually make changes to the settings found
during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
While Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup is in progress, one of the error messages below may
appear.
See also:
2EQ: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
• “Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 50)
• “Speaker Distance” (➔ page 51)
Ambient noise is too high.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
Retry
Cancel
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
Error message
The options are:
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s
volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover
frequency, and then try running Audyssey 2EQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection
issues may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
`Retry:
Try again.
`Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
• Ambient noise is too high.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of
the noise and try again.
• Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different from that
of the first measurement. Check the speaker connection.
• Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again. If
this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact your
Onkyo dealer.
• Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No”
means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings
(➔ page 11).
En-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Using the Listening Modes
Selecting Listening Modes
See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information
about the listening modes (➔ page 36).
■ Listening Mode Buttons
Press RECEIVER first.
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME
MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with movies and TV.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with music.
GAME button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with video games.
STEREO button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode and All
Channel Stereo listening mode.
MUSIC
MOVIE/TV
GAME
STEREO
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to
the AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial,
optical, or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depends on the format
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying
Source Information” (➔ page 41).
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the
following listening modes: Mono, Direct, and Stereo.
En-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Input Source
Speaker Layout
About Listening Modes
The following audio formats are supported by the listening
modes.
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each
channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker
setup (➔ page 50).
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
This is mono (monophonic) sound.
A
C
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two
independent audio signal channels are reproduced
through two speakers.
S
■ Explanatory Notes
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround
system has five main channels of sound and a sixth
subwoofer channel (called the point-one channel).
D
f
ab
c ij
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a
F
further sound enhancement to 5.1-channel sound
with two additional speakers that provide greater
sound envelopment and more accurate positioning
of sounds.
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround
G
H
system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded
sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded
material.
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This
provides a center back surround channel from 5.1-
channel sources.
de gh
abFront speakers
Center speaker
deSurround speakers
Subwoofer(s)
ghSurround back speakers
ijFront high speakers
N
B
V
c
f
En-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Speaker
Source Layout
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual
surround sound even with only two or three
speakers. This works by controlling how
sounds reach the listener’s left and right ears.
Good results may not be possible if there’s
too much reverb, so we recommend that you
or no natural reverb.
A ZXC
S N
D
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this
mode emphasizes the surround channels in
order to widen the stereo image, and
simulates the natural reverberation of a large
hall.
A CN
T – D
S
O r c h e s t r a
F
D
G
F
H
G
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals and
jazz, this mode emphasizes the front stereo
image, giving the impression of being right
in front of the stage.
H
U n p l u g g e d
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to
music in this mode creates a lively sound
field with a powerful acoustic image, like
being at a club or rock concert.
S t u d i o – M i x
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
shows produced in a TV studio, surround
effects to the entire sound, and clarity to
voices.
T V L o g i c
Game-RPG
G a m e – R P G
Game-Action
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic feel
with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra
mode.
In this mode, sound localization is distinct
with emphasis on bass.
G a m e – A c t i o n
Game-Rock
In this mode, sound pressure is emphasized
to heighten live feel.
G a m e – R o c k
Game-Sports
In this mode, reverberation is increased and
sound localization decreased slightly.
G a m e – S p o r t s
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills
the entire listening area with stereo sound
from the front, surround, and surround back
speakers.
XCN
A l
l
C h S t e r e o
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same
sound in mono, so the sound you hear is the
same regardless of where you are within the
listening room.
F u l
l
M o n o
En-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Listening Modes
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Speaker
Source Layout
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
DTS
In this mode, audio from the input source is
output without surround-sound processing.
The speaker configuration (presence of
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker
distance, A/V Sync and much of the
processing set via the audio setup are
details (➔ page 43).
D XCN
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source is
output without surround-sound processing.
The speaker configuration (presence of
enabled, but much of the processing set via
the audio setup is disabled. See “On-screen
Setup” for more details (➔ page 43).
A ZXC
D T S
*1
S N
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
D i r e c t
D XCN
F XCN
D
F
G
H
*1
*1
D T S – H D H R
DTS-HD Master
Audio
D XCN
F XCN
Stereo
Sound is output from the front left and right
speakers and subwoofer.
N
D T S – H D MS T R
S t e r e o
DTS Express
D XCN
D XCN
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie
with a mono soundtrack, or use it with the
foreign language soundtracks recorded in the
left and right channels of some movies. It
can also be used with DVDs or other sources
containing multiplexed audio, such as
karaoke DVDs.
D T S E x p r e s s
M o n o
DTS 96/24*4
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24
sources. This is high-resolution DTS with a
96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution,
providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
D T S 9 6 / 2 4
Multichannel
This mode is for use with PCM multichannel
sources.
D XCN
F
DTS-ES Discrete*5
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete
soundtracks, which use a discrete surround
back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel
playback. The seven totally separate audio
channels provide better spatial imaging and
360-degree sound localization, perfect for
sounds that pan across the surround
channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the
DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-
ES Discrete soundtrack.
G V
M u l
t
i c h
E S D i s c r e t e
DSD*2
In this mode, audio from the input source is
output without surround-sound processing.
The speaker configuration (presence of
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker
distance, A/V Sync and much of the
processing set via the audio setup are
enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more
details (➔ page 43).
D XCN
D S D
Dolby Digital
D o l b y
D
Dolby Digital Plus*3
D XCN
F XCN
*1
*1
D o l b y
D
+
DTS-ES Matrix*5
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix
soundtracks, which use a matrix-encoded
back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.
G V
Dolby TrueHD
D XCN
F XCN
E S M a t
r
i x
D o l b y T r u e H D
En-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
DTS Neo:6
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*6
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel
source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides
a very natural and seamless surround-sound
experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial
effects and vivid imaging.
This mode expands any 2-channel source for
up to 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven
full-bandwidth channels of matrix decoding
for matrix-encoded material, providing a
very natural and seamless surround sound
experience that fully envelops the listener.
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g.,
TV, DVD, VHS).
• DTS Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
S XCN
D V
N e o : 6 C i n e m a
N e o : 6 M u s i c
If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used
instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
S XCN
x
x
x
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
• DTS Neo:6
N e o : 6
channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Note
*1
Use this mode with video games, especially
those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output
the sound.
*2
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player, setting the
output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
• Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
modes to expand 5.1-channel sources for
7.1-channel playback.
D V
*3
*4
*5
*6
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to
more effectively use existing program
material when height channel speaker
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height can be used to upmix a variety of
sources from movies and music, but are
particularly well-suited to upmix game
content.
S B
D
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
F
P L
z
H e i g h t
G
H
Dolby EX
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback. They’re especially
suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include
a matrix-encoded surround back channel.
The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping
surround sound experience, perfect for
rotating and fly-by sound effects.
D V
H
D o l b y
D
E X
En-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
ENTER again switches to that selection. If you want
to play music files on a server, use q/w/e/rto
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER.
Tip
Using the Home Menu
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be filled in
black.
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as
their positioning on screen (➔ page 61).
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used
menus.
■ USB
`With this selection, you can play contents of portable
players (iPod, etc.) and USB storage devices connected
to the AV receiver’s USB port (➔ pages 24, 25).
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait
until it becomes operable.
Note
The Home menu appears only on a TV that is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.
• This function cannot be selected when:
– No signal is present on the current input source.
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the contents
of the media connected, followed by q/wto select the
desired folder or track. Pressing ENTER as a track is
selected will start playback.
1
■ Setup
`With this selection, you can access the common
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu
(➔ page 46).
■ InstaPrevue
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI
IN 1/2/3/4/5). Even with multiple components
connected through HDMI, you can easily switch
between inputs as their previews are displayed on a
single screen.
Tip
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick
Setup (➔ page 43).
Use e/ror q/wand ENTER to make the desired
2
■ Firmware Update
Press ENTER to display the main preview (currently
preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch
the AV receiver to that input source.
selection.
Press HOME to close the menu.
`With this selection, you can update the firmware of the
AV receiver. Note that this selection will be grayed out
for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
Please wait until it becomes operable.
■ Network Service
Press ENTER to start the procedure (➔ page 79).
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 89).
`With this selection, you can use various Internet radio
services or play the contents stored in media connected
to your home network (DLNA) (➔ pages 26 to 29).
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait
until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to display the network service screen.
If you want to use the Internet radio services, use
q/w/e/rto select the desired service. Pressing
En-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Using the Sleep Timer
Displaying Source Information
Changing the Input Display
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
off automatically after a specified period.
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo component, you
must configure the input display so that ucan work
properly.
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
information.
1
1
This setting can be done only from the front panel.
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10
minute steps.
“TV/CD” or “GAME” appears on the AV receiver’s
Tip
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display when the sleep timer has been set. The
specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds, then
the previous display reappears.
display.
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver.
Press and hold down the same button (about
3 seconds) to change the input display.
Repeat this step to select the desired input display.
2
The following information can be typically displayed.
Tip
■ TV/CD:
TV/CD → DOCK
volume*1
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,
press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on SLEEP as
the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less, the sleep
timer will go off.
→
TAPE
■ GAME:
GAME ↔ DOCK
Listening mode
Signal format*2
“
Note
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME”
input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
remote controller for the first time (➔ page 70).
Setting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display.
Sampling
frequency*2
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER
1
repeatedly to switch between: normal, dim, or
dimmer brightness.
Input signal
resolution
Tip
• Alternatively, you can use DIMMER on the AV receiver.
Output resolution
*1
When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number, and
frequency are displayed.
*2
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the
previously displayed information reappears.
En-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Using the Music Optimizer
Using Headphones
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality
of compressed music files.
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES
1
jack.
Press MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the front panel.
1
While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
The M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display.
The MUSIC OPTIMIZER indicator lights on the
front panel.
jack, =indicator lights.
Note
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
Tip
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Powered Zone 2
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode
is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono or
Direct.
• Alternatively, you can use Q SETUP on the remote
controller.
• See “Music Optimizer” for more details (➔ page 45).
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV
receiver, no sound will be output from the headphones jack.
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
1
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.
Tip
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is
set to standby.
En-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Input
Using the Quick Setup
On-screen Setup
`You can select input sources and view the following
information: the name of input selectors, input
assignments, radio information, and ARC function
setting.
In addition, previews of the video streams coming from
HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) are displayed.
“EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can only be selected if
they are assigned to HDMI, component, coaxial, or
optical inputs.
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the Quick
Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).
■ Quick Setup
*1
RECEIVER
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used
settings. You can change settings and view the current
information.
Use q/wto select an input source and view the related
information. Pressing ENTER switches to the selected
input source.
■ Setup menu (HOME)
ENTER
q/w/e/r
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way to
change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are
organized into 9 categories.
Q SETUP
RETURN
`You can change the following settings: “Bass”,
“Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”,
“Audyssey”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Late Night”, “Music Optimizer”, and “Cinema
Filter”.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display
when changing settings.
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
1
2
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired selection.
■ Video
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
`You can change the following settings: “Wide Mode”
*2
and “Picture Mode ”.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
See also:
Explanatory Notes
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 56)
*3
■ Information
■ Music Optimizer
`Off
`On
a
b
`You can view the information of the following items:
“Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
*4
■ Listening Mode
aSetting target
`You can select the listening modes that are grouped in
the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”, “MUSIC”,
“GAME”.
bSetting options (default setting underlined)
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto select the
listening mode. Press ENTER to switch to the
selected listening mode.
B D / DV D
I n p u t
A u d i o
V i d e o
I n f o r m a t i o n
L i s t e n i n g M o d e
To be continued
En-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Speaker Levels
Note
Using the Audio Settings of Quick
Setup
*1
• The video preview is not displayed when:
■ Subwoofer Level
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps
– HDMI IN 6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or
– No signal is present on the current input source.
You can change various audio settings from the Quick
Setup (➔ page 43).
■ Center Level
Note
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening
to an input source.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV
receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you made
here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 51) before
setting the AV receiver to standby.
*2
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture
Mode” (➔ page 56), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust
the following items via the Quick Setup: “Brightness”,
“Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to
return to the “Picture Mode” setting.
• These settings are not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 60).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 60) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
*3
*4
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all
channels shown here output the sound.
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 60).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 60) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Tone Control
Note
■ Bass
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted.
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 50) cannot be adjusted.
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output
from the front speakers.
■ Treble
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output
from the front speakers.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when Direct listening mode is selected.
®
Audyssey
■ Audyssey
See “Audyssey” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 53).
■ Dynamic EQ
See “Dynamic EQ” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 54).
Operating on the AV receiver
■ Dynamic Volume
See “Dynamic Volume” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 54).
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass” or
“Treble”.
1
Note
Use – and + to adjust.
2
• These technologies can be used when all the following conditions
are met:
– Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note that
“Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration”
method.
– Any listening mode other than Direct is selected.
– A pair of headphones is not connected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
En-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Late Night
Music Optimizer
CinemaFILTER
■ Late Night
■ Music Optimizer
■ Cinema Filter
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the
`Off
`Off
options are:
`On
`On
`Off
`Low:
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality
of compressed music files. When set to “On”, the M.Opt
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display, and the
MUSIC OPTIMIZER indicator lights on the front panel.
Turn this setting on to soften overly bright movie
soundtracks, which are typically mixed for reproduction in
a movie theater.
CinemaFILTER can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
Multichannel, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS
96/24, DTS Neo:6, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS Express.
Small reduction in dynamic range.
`High:
Large reduction in dynamic range.
Tip
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
`Auto:
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”
automatically.
`Off
`On
• Alternatively, you can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV
receiver.
Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog
audio input signals.
Note
• The CinemaFILTER may not work when used with certain input
sources.
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct listening mode
is selected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby
Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even
when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching
movies late at night when you don’t want to disturb
anyone.
Note
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that
you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer,
and with some material there will be little or no effect when you
select the different options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source
is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is
set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to
“Auto”.
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot be
used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to “Off”
(➔ page 53).
En-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Explanatory Notes
■ Screen Saver
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)
If there is no video signal on the current input source and
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Main Menu
Speaker Setup
a
b
Remote
indicator
Speaker Configuration
Tip
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
`No
c
d
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 59).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is
operated.
RECEIVER
aMain Menu
ENTER
bSub Menu
q/w/e/r
cSetting target
dSetting options (default setting underlined)
RETURN
HOME
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
2
3
Use e/rto select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a main menu item, and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select a sub menu item, and then press
4
5
Sub Menu
Main Menu
ENTER.
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/rto
change the setting.
Press HOME to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
Note
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by
using SETUP, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.
• During Audyssey 2EQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup,
messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will appear on
the AV receiver’s display.
En-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Main menu item
Sub menu item
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator
Setup menu items
Tuner
Hardware Setup
(➔ page 59)
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces power
consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode.
The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in either of
the following conditions:
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is
off).
HDMI
Main menu item
Sub menu item
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Speaker Settings
Speaker Configuration
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
Multiplex/Mono
Dolby
Auto Standby
Network
Input/Output Assign
(➔ page 48)
Initial Setup
Remote ID
Remote Mode Setup
Remote Controller
Setup
(➔ page 63)
Speaker Setup
(➔ page 50)
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator is
off).
Setup
Lock Setup
(➔ page 63)
HYBRID STANDBY
Audio Adjust
(➔ page 52)
DTS
Theater-Dimensional
Audyssey
Source Setup
(➔ page 53)
IntelliVolume
A/V Sync
Name Edit
Picture Adjust
Audio Selector
BD/DVD
Listening Mode Preset
(➔ page 58)
CBL/SAT
GAME
PC
AUX
Note
TUNER
• If Zones are turned on, the HYBRID STANDBY indicator won’t
light.
TV/CD
NET
USB
EXTRA1
EXTRA2
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
Miscellaneous
(➔ page 59)
En-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD,
EXTRA1, EXTRA2
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5,
HDMI6, HDMI7:
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
`- - - - -:
HDMI Input
Input/Output Assign
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI IN 2,
you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input
selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, composite video and component video
sources can be upconverted and output by the HDMI
output. You can set this for each input selector by selecting
the “- - - - -” option. See “Video Connection Formats” for
more information on video signal flow and upconversion
(➔ page 83).
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
Main Menu
Input/Output Assign
Output composite video and component video
sources from the HDMI output. The video output
signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in
“Component Video Input”.
Monitor Out
*
■ Resolution
`Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at
the same resolution and with no conversion.
`Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.
`480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p:
Select the desired output resolution.
`1080p/24:
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have already
been assigned, you must first set any unused input
HDMI1 - HDMI7 to other input selectors.
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
IN
Tip
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 43).
OUT
Note
Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
• If no video component is connected to HDMI output (even if the
HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video
source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained
here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital
Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or
optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in the “Audio
Selector” setting (➔ page 57).
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 60), otherwise
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation will
not be guaranteed.
`4K Upscaling:
Select this for an output resolution four times that of
1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by
your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096
× 2160 pixels.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
GAME
Default assignment
HDMI1
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI OUT
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution
as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
HDMI2
HDMI3
PC
HDMI4
Tip
AUX
- - - - -
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
“Resolution” setting (excluding NET input source).
TV/CD
- - - - -
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 60), the “HDMI
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.
EXTRA1
EXTRA2
- - - - -
Note
- - - - -
• Depending on the incoming video signal, the video playback may
not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered. In this
case select anything other than “1080p/24”.
• With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is set
to “4K Upscaling”.
En-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
If you connect a video component to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to
COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you must assign “IN1” to the
“BD/DVD” input selector.
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you
must assign “OPTICAL1” to the “TV/CD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
GAME
Default assignment
COAXIAL1
COAXIAL2
OPTICAL1
- - - - -
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
GAME
Default assignment
- - - - -
IN1
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
PC
PC
AUX
- - - - -
AUX
TV/CD
OPTICAL2
- - - - -
TV/CD
EXTRA1
EXTRA2
EXTRA1
EXTRA2
- - - - -
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD,
EXTRA1, EXTRA2
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD,
EXTRA1, EXTRA2
`IN1:
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL1,
OPTICAL2:
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
`- - - - -:
`- - - - -:
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
output.
Select if the component is connected to an analog
audio input.
Tip
Tip
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 43).
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 43).
Note
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 48), the same HDMI IN will be set as
a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to use the
coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in
the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 57).
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono) from a
digital input (optical and coaxial) are 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16,
20, 24 bit.
En-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Speaker Configuration
Note
Speaker Setup
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
selected in the “Front” setting.
1
2
3
4
5
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 32).
“Setup”
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot
be selected.
If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” together with
Zone 2 turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Front High”, this
Main Menu
Speaker Setup
With these settings, you can specify which speakers are
connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker.
Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low
frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a
crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover
optimum crossover frequencies.
by Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
(➔ page 32).
®
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Surround Back”,
this setting is automatically set to “None”.
■ Surround Back Ch
Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey 2EQ
Room Correction and Speaker Setup function, or set them
manually, which is useful if you change one of the
connected speakers after using Audyssey 2EQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup function.
`1ch:
Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected.
`2ch:
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
`No
Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers
are connected.
Speaker Settings
Note
■ Front
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
again (➔ page 32).
`Full Band
`40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is
fixed at “Full Band”.
■ Powered Zone 2
`No
`Yes:
■ LPF of LFE
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
`Off:
*1
*1
■ Center , Surround
Zone 2 speakers can be used. (Powered Zone 2
enabled).
`Full Band
`40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.
Note
`None
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
• Before you change this setting, turn down the volume.
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
*1*2*3*5
■ Front High
`Full Band
`40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
`None
*1*2*3*4
■ Surround Back
`40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
`None
En-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Double Bass
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
This setting is NOT set automatically by
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
(➔ page 32).
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 32).
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 32).
®
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the
listening position so that the sound from each speaker
arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the
built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the
same at the listening position.
`On
`Off
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass
sounds from the front left, right, and center channels to
the subwoofer.
Note
■ Unit
`feet:
• These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the following
cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 60).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 60) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
– The AV receiver is muted.
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1.0ft to 30.0ft in
1.0 foot steps.
`meters:
Note
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is fixed to
“- - -”.
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the “Subwoofer”
and “Front” settings are set for the first time to “Yes” and “Full
Band” respectively.
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.30m to
9.00m in 0.30 meter steps.
*1
■ Left, Front High Left, Center , Front High Right,
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your
listening position.
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
*1
■ Subwoofer
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
Note
Note
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 50).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 50).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
*1
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made
by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu (➔ page 44).
Tip
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of
each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position,
measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
En-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ PL IIz Height Gain
Dolby
Audio Adjust
`Low
`Mid
`High
■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro Logic
IIx.
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables
the listener to select how much gain is applied to the front
high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and
order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the
listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their
personal preference.
Main Menu
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Panorama
`On
`Off
Multiplex/Mono
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
Note
■ Multiplex
• If the “Front High” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 50), this
setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” (➔ page 50)
and Zone 2 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
Input Channel
`Main
`Sub
Dimension
`–3 to 0 to +3
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or
backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field
backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve
the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s
in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move it
backward.
`Main/Sub
■ Dolby EX
`Auto:
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
Dolby EX listening mode is used.
`Manual:
You can select any available listening mode.
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are
handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround back
speakers are connected. This setting is effective with
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only.
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels
or languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
■ Mono
Input Channel
`Left + Right
`Left
`Right
Center Width
`0 to 3 to 7
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output from
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the
front left and right speakers to create a phantom center).
This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,
allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel
sound.
Note
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or 2-
channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 50),
this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” (➔ page 50)
and Zone 2 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
En-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ TrueHD Loudness Management
`Off
Theater-Dimensional
Source Setup
■ Listening Angle
`Wide:
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees.
`Narrow:
`On
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Note
Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the
front left and right speakers relative to the listening
position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be
equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”
(➔ page 45).
Preparation
Press the input selector buttons to select an input source.
Main Menu
Source Setup
DTS
®
Audyssey
■ Neo:6 Music
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
Center Image
`0 to 2 to 5
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
®
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
To enable the following settings, you must first perform
the Room Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 32).
• These technologies cannot be used when:
–a pair of headphones is connected, or
Listening angle: 30°
–Direct listening mode is selected.
Note
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the sound
of the center channel to left and right (outwards).
■ Audyssey
`Off
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20° and
“Wide” to 40°.
`Movie:
Select this setting for movie material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
`Music:
Select this setting for music material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,
“Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.
En-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Dynamic EQ
`Off
`On:
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great sound
even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating
sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics. It does so
by selecting the correct frequency response and surround
volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content
sounds the way it was created at any volume level — not
just at reference level.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film
mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference
response and surround envelopment when the volume is
turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is
not always used in music or other non-film content.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides
three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB,
and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the
content is not within the standard.
®
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at any
user-selected volume setting. The result is bass response,
tonal balance, and surround impression that remain
constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ
combines information from incoming source levels with
actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for
delivering a loudness correction solution.
®
Note
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology cannot
be used.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ works well by itself. However, if
Audyssey 2EQ is on, the two technologies work in
tandem to provide well-balanced sound for every listener
at any volume level.
■ Dynamic Volume
`Off
`Light:
®
■ Reference Level
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
Activates Light Compression Mode.
`0dB:
`Medium:
Activates Medium Compression Mode.
`Heavy:
®
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
This should be selected for movie contents.
`5dB:
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large
variations in volume level between television programs,
commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of
movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume
setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of
program material is being perceived by listeners in real
time to decide whether an adjustment is needed.
Whenever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the
necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the
desired playback volume level while optimizing the
dynamic range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
between television channels or changing from stereo to
surround sound content.
Select this setting for content that has a very wide
dynamic range, such as classical music.
`10dB:
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This setting
affects volume the most. It quiets the loud parts, such
as explosions, and boosts the quiet parts so they can
be heard.
Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a
wider dynamic range. This setting should also be
selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at
10 dB below film reference.
Note
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set to
“On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is
automatically switched to “Off”.
`15dB:
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other
program material that is mixed at very high listening
levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference.
To achieve the same reference level in a home theater
system each speaker level must be adjusted so that
–30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise
produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening
position. A home theater system automatically calibrated
®
by Audyssey 2EQ will play at reference level when the
master volume control is set to the 0 dB position. At that
level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
En-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
IntelliVolume
Name Edit
Space:
Enters a space character.
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen.
■ IntelliVolume
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
*1
Shift :
Toggles between lower and upper case characters.
(Left)/ (Right):
Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
area.
■ Name
Use e/rto set the level.
*2
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then
1
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use e
to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use rto
increase its input level.
Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
character.
OK:
press ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to
2
Note
Confirms your entry.
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2.
Tip
ENTER.
*1
This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
A/V Sync
controller.
Name input area
*2
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the
■ A/V Sync
characters you have input.
4 - 4. Name Edit
Name
BD/DVD
`0 msec to 800 msec in 10 msec steps
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and sound
are out of sync. With this setting, you can correct this by
delaying the audio signals.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
ENTER.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Tip
a
n
b
o
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
i
j
k
x
l
m
z
s
v
9
w
0
y
^
• To name a radio preset, select AM or FM, and then select the
preset (➔ page 31).
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with CLR,
select “OK” and then press ENTER.
1
,
2
.
3
/
4
;
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
]
–
\
Space
Shift
Back Space
OK
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
Note
• This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors.
A
N
!
B
O
˝
C
P
#
D
Q
$
E
R
F
S
&
`
G
T
’
H
I
J
K
L
M
U
(
V
)
W
_
X
=
Y
˜
Z
|
The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether
your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if the
“LipSync” setting is set to “On” or not (➔ page 61).
%
<
>
?
+
{
}
Space
Shift
Back Space
OK
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
Note
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Direct listening mode is used with
an analog input source.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.
En-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*1
*2*3*4
■ Picture Mode
`Custom:
■ Game Mode
`Off
`On
Picture Adjust
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality
and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.
To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To
return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
All settings can be performed manually.
`Cinema:
Select when the picture source is a movie or alike.
`Game:
Select when the video source is a game console.
`Through:
Does not adjust picture quality (changes resolution).
`Direct:
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the corresponding
input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”.
The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will
become poor.
*1*6
■ Wide Mode
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
`4:3:
*2*4
■ Film Mode
`Video:
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change
resolution). The video coming from an analog input
and output by HDMI output is processed in the same
way as “Through”.
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the input
signal is handled as a video source.
`Auto:
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate conversion is
applied.
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one
operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”,
“Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation” or “Color
Temperature”.
`Full:
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive
signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original
picture.
`Zoom:
*2*4*5
■ Edge Enhancement
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With this setting, you can make the picture appear sharper.
`Wide Zoom:
*2*4*5
■ Noise Reduction
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
`Auto:
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the
screen. Select the desired level.
According to the input signals and monitor output
“4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. See
“Monitor Out” for details on the monitor output
setting (➔ page 48).
En-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*1*2*4
■ Brightness
Audio Selector
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
Mode)
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the picture brightness.
“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Audio Selector
`ARC:
■ Fixed Mode
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to
`Off:
*1*2*4
■ Contrast
*1
HDMI OUT of the AV receiver.
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be
automatically selected as a priority among other
assignments.
`PCM:
*1*2*4
`HDMI:
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be produced.
`DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the dts
indicator will flash and there will be no sound.
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify the
signal type in “Fixed Mode”.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of the
following issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you
can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off,
try setting the format to PCM.
■ Hue
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI
OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is
automatically selected as a priority.
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue between
“–50” and “+50”.
*1*2*4
■ Saturation
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the
weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
`COAXIAL:
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and
HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is
automatically selected as a priority.
*2*4
■ Color Temperature
`Warm
`Normal
`Cool
`OPTICAL:
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both optical and HDMI
inputs have been assigned, optical input is
automatically selected as a priority.
With this setting, you can adjust the color temperature.
Note
`Analog:
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used with the NET input selector.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a
DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
You can set priorities of audio output when there are both
digital and analog inputs.
*1
This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller
by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 43).
When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other than
“Custom”, this setting cannot be used.
Note
*2
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the setting in
“Audio Selector”.
Note
*3
If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K Upscaling”
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned
to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input
selectors.
(➔ page 48), this setting is fixed at “Off”.
Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.
at “Off”.
*4
*5
*1
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector.
But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio Return
“Full”.
Channel” setting (➔ page 61).
En-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Use q/wto select the signal format that you want to
set, and then use e/rto select a listening mode.
Only listening modes that can be used with each input
signal format can be selected (➔ pages 35 to 39).
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is
selected.
Listening Mode Preset
2
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via
HDMI).
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
Main Menu
Listening Mode Preset
source that will be selected automatically when you select
each input source. For example, you can set the default
listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals.
You can select other listening modes during playback, but
the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV
receiver has been set to standby.
Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel
PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and
DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.
Note
• For the “AM” or “FM” input selector, only “Analog” will
be available.
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, only “Digital”
will be available.
Use q/wto select the input source that you want to
1
■ Analog/PCM/Digital
set, and then press ENTER.
The following menu appears.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turntable,
radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD,
DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.
5-1. Listening Mode Preset
BD/DVD
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source
Last Valid e r
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Note
• For the “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” input selectors, only
“PCM” is available.
■ Mono/Multiplex Source
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD,
etc.).
■ 2ch Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources, such as
Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies
the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,
such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
En-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
OSD Setup
Miscellaneous
Hardware Setup
■ On Screen Display
`On
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
“Setup”
`Off
This preference determines whether operation details are
displayed on-screen when an AV receiver function is
adjusted.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be
output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN.
Main Menu
Miscellaneous
Main Menu
Hardware Setup
Tuner
Volume Setup
■ AM/FM Frequency Step
`10kHz/200kHz:
`9kHz/50kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your area.
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
■ Maximum Volume
`Off, 30 to 79
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
■ Language
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska
This setting determines the language used for the on-screen
menus.
■ Power On Volume
`Last, Min, 1 to 79 or Max
Note
■ Screen Saver
`3 min, 5 min, 10 min
`Off
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen saver
activates itself. Once active, the screen saver will go off
and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV
receiver is operated in any way.
With this setting, you can specify the volume setting to be
used each time the AV receiver is turned on.
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV
receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher than
the “Maximum Volume” setting.
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.
■ Headphone Level
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this setting, you can specify the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a
volume difference between your speakers and your
headphones.
En-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ HDMI Through
■ Audio TV Out
HDMI
`Off
`Off
■ HDMI Control(RIHD)
`Off
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD,
EXTRA1, EXTRA2:
`On
This preference determines whether the incoming audio
signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to
turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the
HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a
connected component through your TV’s speakers.
Normally, this should be set to “Off”.
Selects the input source for which the HDMI
Through function is enabled.
`Last:
`On
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the
AV receiver (➔ page 86).
The HDMI Through function is activated on the input
source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver
to standby mode.
Note
Note
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the names
of connected p-compatible components and “RIHD On”
are displayed on the AV receiver.
When enabling the HDMI Through function, regardless of
whether the AV receiver is on or in standby, both audio
and video streams from an HDMI input will be output to
the TV or other components via HDMI connection. The
HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit in standby mode. Note
that the indicator may not light under certain conditions
(➔ page 47).
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the
above “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,
resulting in automatic input source selection.
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the
AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this
case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s display by
pressing DISPLAY.
fixed to “Auto”.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component,
it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc. (“ ” shows up
and indicates the number of components, when two or more are
received).
*
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even
when this setting is set to “On”.
• When an p-compatible component is connected to the
AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the connected
component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example,
while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player (being powered on) with the remote control of
the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will
be displayed on the AV receiver.
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible
or not.
• When “Audio TV Out” or “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to
“On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers
(➔ page 15), turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will
make the sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and
right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
down the AV receiver’s volume.
Note
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via “HDMI Input”
setting is enabled (➔ page 48).
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the
HDMI Through function; however in the following cases, the
power consumption can be saved:
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to
“On” and the input source is not HDMI.
– The TV is in standby mode.
– You are watching a TV program.
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the setting to
“Off”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input source
may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• When the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter standby
mode as usual.)
• When the source equipment is connected with the u
set to “On”.
En-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Audio Return Channel (ARC)
■ LipSync
Auto Standby
`Off
`Off
■ Auto Standby
`Auto:
`On
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to
HDMI OUT of the AV receiver.
`Off
`On
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically
correct any delay between the video and the audio, based
on the data from the connected monitor.
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an ARC
capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT of the
AV receiver. To use this function, you must select the
TV/CD input selector and your TV must be ARC capable.
The ARC indicator will light when the audio signal is
detected. Default setting: “- - - -”
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the ASb indicator
lights and the AV receiver will automatically enter standby
mode if there is no operation for 30 minutes with no audio
and no video signal input.
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s display
and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on.
Note
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports
HDMI Lip Sync.
■ InstaPrevue
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home menu
(➔ page 40) and specify the preview display of HDMI
video streams.
Note
Note
• This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself during
playback with some sources.
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2 is on.
Sub Window
`Multi:
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.
`Single:
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
thumbnails displayed.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be
After changing the settings of the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)”, “HDMI Through” or “Audio
Return Channel”, turn off the power on all connected
pieces of equipment and then turn them on again. Refer
to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of
equipment.
Position
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)
`Top, Bottom, Left, Right
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)
`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower Right
With this setting, you can set the position of preview
thumbnails on the TV screen.
Note
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.
En-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Network Standby
`On
`Off
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit while
the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that the indicator
may not light under certain conditions (➔ page 47).
Network
Note
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP Address”,
“Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server” settings
yourself.
After modifying the network settings, you must confirm
the changes by executing “Save”.
■ IP Address
`Class A:
“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”
`Class B:
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”
`Class C:
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service
Provider (ISP).
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
Note
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to
change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set to
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e.,
DHCP is set to “Enable”). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled (you’re for example using static
IP), you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in
which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
essential.
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly increases in
standby mode.
■ Update Notice
`Enable
`Disable
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
firmware update via network is available.
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
■ Subnet Mask
What’s DHCP?
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically 255.255.255.0).
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by
routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to
automatically configure themselves on a network.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS
to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
Note
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window will
switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 19).
• For details on the update notification, see “If the “Firmware
■ Gateway
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
Update Available” window appears.” (➔ page 19).
■ DNS Server
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
Initial Setup
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 20).
■ Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
■ Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
■ MAC Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
■ DHCP
`Enable
`Disable
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
En-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Remote Controller Setup
Lock Setup
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”
“Setup”
Main Menu
Remote Controller Setup
Main Menu
Lock Setup
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
Remote ID
■ Remote ID
`1, 2, or 3
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate
the AV receiver from other components, you can change
its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.
■ Setup
`Locked
`Unlocked
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be
locked and you cannot change any setting.
Note
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change
the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you
won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.
Changing the remote controller’s ID
While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
down Q SETUP until the remote indicator lights
1
(about 3 seconds).
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
The remote indicator flashes twice.
2
Remote Mode Setup
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 68).
En-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an
Additional Amplifier
Zone 2
Main room
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy
playback in another room, or as we call Zone 2. And, you
can select a different source for each room.
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main
listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2.
TV
Main room
AV receiver
Making Zone 2 Connections
There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an additional amplifier.
TV
AV receiver
Connecting the Zone Speakers Directly to
the AV receiver
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main
room and Zone 2. This is called Powered Zone, as the
Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.
R
L
Zone 2
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone
2 setting (➔ page 50).
Zone 2
IN
R
L
Note
Receiver/
integrated amp
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2 is controlled by the AV
receiver.
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is
reduced to 5.1 channels.
Note
• The volume of Zone 2 must be set on the Zone 2 amplifier.
En-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Muting Zone 2
Controlling Zone 2 Components
Press ZONE2, then point the remote controller at
the AV receiver and press 8RECEIVER.
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV
receiver’s display.
1
■ Operating on the remote controller
■ Operating on the AV receiver
Input selector buttons
Press ZONE2 followed by MUTING.
1
ZONE 2 OFF
MASTER VOLUME
To select an input source for Zone 2, press ZONE2,
2
3
followed by an INPUT SELECTOR button.
Tip
To turn off Zone 2, press ZONE2, followed by
8RECEIVER.
• To unmute, press ZONE2followed by MUTING again. Zone can
also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
The zone is turned off.
Note
• Only analog input sources are output from the ZONE 2 LINE
OUT jacks and ZONE 2 L/R terminals. Digital input sources are
not output. If no sound is heard when an input source is selected,
verify that the source is connected to an analog input.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your
main room and Zone 2. The same AM/FM radio station will be
heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM station
for the main room, that station will also be output in Zone 2.
• When you have selected NET or USB as input selector, the last
selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2.
• When Zone 2 is activated and its input selector is selected, the
power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.
• While Zone 2 is on, ufunctions will not work.
Adjusting the Volume for Zone 2
To turn on Zone 2 and select an input source, press
ZONE 2 followed by an input selector button within
8 seconds.
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV
receiver’s display.
1
2
■ Operating on the remote controller
Press ZONE2.
1
2
Use VOL q/w.
To select the same source as the main room’s, press
ZONE 2 twice. “Z2 Sel: Source” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
■ Operating on the AV receiver
To turn off Zone 2, press OFF.
The zone is turned off.
Press ZONE 2 (the Z2 indicator on the AV
receiver’s display flash).
1
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone 2 is
active, the Z2 indicator is dimly lit.
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds.
2
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” cannot be selected as input sources
for Zone 2.
• When “EXTRA1” or “EXTRA2” is the input source of Main
room and Zone 2 is set to share the same source, no sound will be
output from Zone 2.
■ Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2, you must press ZONE2 on the remote
controller first.
If your Zone 2 speakers are connected to a receiver or
integrated amplifier in Zone 2, use its volume control to
adjust the volume.
ZONE2
8RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECTOR
MUTING
VOLq/w
En-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Other Remote Operations
You can use the remote controller that came with the AV
receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions. The
available functionality depends on the AV receiver.
RI Dock
iPod/iPhone Playback
via Onkyo Dock
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of your
iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and videos of your
iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the on-screen display
(OSD) allows you to view, navigate, and select your
iPod/iPhone model’s contents on your TV, and with the
supplied remote controller, you can control your
iPod/iPhone from the comfort of your sofa. You can even
use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate your
iPod/iPhone.
Note
Using the Onkyo Dock
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
Dock.
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are different
depending on the region.
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
http://www.onkyo.com
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
from the Apple web site.
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the instruction
manual of the Onkyo Dock.
iPod Alarm
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time
and select your iPod as the input source automatically.
Note
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV
receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔ page 69).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable
(➔ page 17).
Note
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being played
or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in sound (Beep).
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which music
files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ page 41).
■ System Function
■ Operating Notes
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
volume.
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its volume
control has no effect.
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone while
it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set too loud
before you reconnect your headphones.
Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
System On
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when RI
Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can be
turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.
Auto Power On
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback) while
the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver will
automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as the input
source, and your iPod/iPhone will start playback.
Direct Change
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to another
input source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to
the input to which the RI Dock is connected.
En-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ uDock operation
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,
you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock with the
buttons described further in this section.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
entering a remote control code (➔ page 69).
TOP MENU*1
a
e 8SOURCE*2
DISPLAY*3
b q/w/e/r, ENTER
f
MUTING
PLAYLIST e/r
g
e
ALBUM +/–
h
i VOL q/w
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
REPEAT
MENU
MODE*4
d
j
k
f
g
h
RANDOM
RI Dock
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
instruction manual of the RI Dock.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
i
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control code
(without u). In this case, make an uconnection and
enter the remote control code 81993 (with u).
*1
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the
DS-A2 RI Dock.
a
b
j
*2
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI
Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not respond the
first time you press this button, in which case you should press
it again. This is because the remote controller transmits the On
and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is
already on, it will remain on when the remote controller
transmits the On command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is
already off, it will remain off when the remote controller
transmits the Off command.
■ With the RI Control
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control code
81993 (with u).
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 41).
c
d
■ Without the RI Control
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
(➔ page 70).
*3
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
Resume mode
k
*4
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the
song that was playing when you removed your iPod/iPhone
from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.
En-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
If you can control the component, use q/wto select
“OK”, and then press ENTER.
Looking up for Remote Control Codes
Controlling Other
Components
9
You can look up for an appropriate remote control code
from the on-screen menu.
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote Mode
Setup” front screen.
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control
your other AV components. This section explains how to
enter the remote control code for a component that you
want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.
Note
If you cannot control the component, use q/wto
select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.
• This can only be carried out using the on-screen menu.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
Use e/rto select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.
2
3
Use q/wto select “Remote Controller Setup”, and
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling
the components listed. You do not need to enter a remote
control code to control these components.
For details on controlling these components, see the
indicated pages.
then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Remote Mode Setup”, and then
4
press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a remote mode, and then press
5
ENTER.
The menu of category selection appears.
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 71)
TV/CD Onkyo CD player (➔ page 70)
Use q/wto select a category, and then press
6
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then press
7
ENTER.
Repeat this step for the first three characters of the
brand name.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
“Search” and press ENTER.
A list of brand names is retrieved.
If the desired brand name is not found:
Use rto select “Not Listed”, and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.
Use q/wto select a brand, and then press ENTER.
8
A remote control code with its instructions are
displayed. Follow the procedure.
En-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Entering Remote Control Codes
Remapping Colored Buttons
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you
want to control.
You can change the configuration of colored buttons, with
which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.
Look up the appropriate remote control code in the
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
1
1
separate Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
player, TV, etc.).
that you want to program, press and hold down A
(Red) until the remote indicator lights (about 3
seconds).
You can only change colored buttons for components
whose codes belong to categories of the Remote
Control Codes list (BD/DVD player, TV, cable set-top
box, etc).
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to
2
which you want to assign a code, press and hold
down DISPLAY (about 3 seconds).
The remote indicator lights.
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons in the
order that you want to reassign them.
2
Note
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER
and the multi zone button.
The button presses are assigned to each button from
left to right. The remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the sequence has been successfully
assigned. If the sequence is not successfully assigned,
the remote indicator will flash once slowly.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
remote control codes from any category can be assigned for
the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also
work as input selector buttons (➔ page 22), so choose a
REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to
which you connect your component. For example, if you
connect your CD player to the CD input, choose TV/CD
when entering its remote control code.
Tip
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings,
see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons” (➔ page 70).
Note
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter
the 5-digit remote control code.
The remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully,
the remote indicator will flash once slowly.
3
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
operation will be cancelled.
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in
Receiver mode or when ZONE 2 is active.
Note
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time
of release, they are subject to change.
En-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
`71323:
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via RI
Controlling Other Components
Onkyo CD recorder without u
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
component, you can control your component as described
below.
For details on entering a remote control code for other
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 69).
`82990:
Onkyo Dock without u
Onkyo components that are connected via uare
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with
1
an ucable and an analog audio cable (RCA).
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for details
(➔ page 17).
Controlling a TV
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
that you want to reset, press and hold down HOME
until the remote indicator lights (about 3 seconds).
1
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for
*1
controlling a TV that supports the p (limited to
Enter the appropriate remote control code for a
2
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
some models). The TV must be able to receive remote
control commands via pand be connected to the
AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via
pdoesn’t work very well, program your TV’s
remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode
to control your TV.
REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
previous section.
2
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that the
button has been reset.
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
with a remote control code. When a button is reset, its
preprogrammed code is restored.
`42157:
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u
`81993:
Onkyo Dock with u
Use the following remote control codes:
`11807/13100/13500:
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and operate
the component.
3
Resetting the Remote Controller
TV with p
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
Controlling Apple TV
Controlling Onkyo components without u
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the
remote controller directly at it, or you want to control an
Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use the
following remote control codes:
`30627:
While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
down HOME until the remote indicator lights
(about 3 seconds).
By programming the supplied remote controller with the
1
appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate
your Apple TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`02615:
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that the
remote controller has been reset.
2
Apple TV
Onkyo DVD player without u
`71817:
Onkyo CD player without u
`32900/33100/33500:
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
`32901/33104/33504:
Onkyo HD DVD player
`70868:
Onkyo MD recorder without u
En-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ TV operation
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
DVD Player or DVD Recorder
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
Number: 1 to 9, 0
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w, g
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code
MUTING
Number: +10*1
DISPLAY
CH +/–
*1
for controlling a component that supports the p
GUIDE
b
i
k
l
m
n
o
(limited to some models). The component must be able to
receive remote control commands via pand be
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI.
Use the following remote control codes:
`32910/33101/33501/31612:
h
ENTER
PREV CH
RETURN
AUDIO*1
CLR
SETUP
d
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
*1
7, 6
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p
i
j
*1
A (Red)
f
*1
B (Green)
*1
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC system
*1
control function of the HDMI standard.
C (Yellow)
a
b
*1
D (Blue)
k
l
■ Blu-ray Disc player / HD DVD player operation
Available buttons
TOP MENU
c
d
b
h 8SOURCE
m
n
DISPLAY
c q/w/e/r
i
ENTER
MUTING
CH +/–
j
k
SETUP
d
DISC +/–
MENU
e
f
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
l
m
n
o
A (Red)
RETURN
AUDIO*1
CLR
f
B (Green)
C (Yellow)
D (Blue)
g
Number: 1 to 9, 0
g
Number: +10*1
o
En-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ DVD player / DVD recorder operation
■ Satellite receiver / Cable receiver operation
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
TOP MENU
Available buttons
GUIDE
Number: 1 to 9, 0
b
h 8SOURCE
b
g
Number: +10
DISPLAY
MUTING
CH +/–
c q/w/e/r
c q/w/e/r
i
j
k
ENTER
ENTER
h 8SOURCE
h
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY
MUTING
CH +/–
d
d
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
DISC +/–
MENU
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
l
m
n
o
*1
RETURN
AUDIO*1
CLR
PREV CH
RETURN
AUDIO
A (Red)
A (Red)
f
g
f
B (Green)
C (Yellow)
B (Green)
C (Yellow)
D (Blue)
i
j
*1
*1
D (Blue)
CLR
Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
k
l
Available buttons
■ VCR/PVR operation
b
Number: 1 to 9, 0
c q/w/e/r
g
ENTER
Available buttons
Number: +10
c
d
GUIDE
SETUP
d
h 8SOURCE
b
h 8SOURCE
m
n
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
c q/w/e/r
i
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
i
ENTER
7, 6
MUTING
MUTING
CH +/–
j
k
l
m
o
j
SEARCH
DISC +/–
SETUP
d
f
k
e
f
REPEAT
RANDOM
MODE
CLR
PREV CH
RETURN
CLR
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
o
7, 6
Number: 1 to 9, 0
g
Number: +10
Note
■ Cassette tape deck operation
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
g
Available buttons
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 67).
e 1, t(Reverse
Playback), 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
h 8SOURCE
o
MUTING
j
*1
The pfunction is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.
En-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Audio
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display
when changing settings.
Troubleshooting
■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
Make sure that the digital input source is selected
properly.
49
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 14
in all the way.
Power
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter
standby mode.
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all
components are connected properly.
15-17
12
■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged
into the wall outlet.
—
—
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
Make sure that the input source is properly selected. 22
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
12
■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for
home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,
allowing precise adjustment.
—
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby
mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches.
61
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV
receiver’s display, press the remote controller’s
MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver.
42
■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the
power, it turns off again
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio
presets and custom settings.
While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output from the speakers.
42
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the 12
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make
sure that all speaker cables and input sources are
properly connected, and leave the AV receiver with
its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that,
reconnect the power cord and turn the power on. If
the AV receiver turns off again, unplug the power
cord and contact your Onkyo dealer.
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to
an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output
settings, and be sure to select a supported audio
format.
—
Remote indicator
Check the digital audio output setting on the
connected device. On some game consoles, such as
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.
—
RECEIVER
Caution: If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, the speaker cables may be
shorting.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
—
—
—
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must
connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
WARNING
HOME
If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are
bent, twisted, or damaged.
Not all listening modes use all speakers.
35
51
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3
seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the
individual speaker levels.
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not
still connected.
—
En-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. 57
Set it to “Off”.
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main
room is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high and
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
—
■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
■ The subwoofer produces no sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, 38
only the front speakers and subwoofer produce
sound.
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD.
45
53
When you play source material that contains no
information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer
produces no sound.
—
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness
Management” setting is not set to “Off”. The Late
Night function doesn’t work when this setting is
disabled.
Check the Speaker Configuration.
50
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
50
■ Only the center speaker produces sound
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM
radio station or mono TV program, the sound is
concentrated in the center speaker.
—
■ About DTS signals
Check the digital audio output setting on the
connected device. On some game consoles, such as
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.
—
When DTS program material ends and the DTS
bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS
—
is to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player. If
you switch your player from DTS to PCM, you may
not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
stop your player for about three seconds and then
resume playback.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
—
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
50
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes 35-39
cannot be selected.
■ The surround speakers produce no sound
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or
Mono listening mode is selected, the surround
speakers produce no sound.
—
■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback
If no surround back speakers and front high speakers
are connected, or the Zone 2 speakers are being used,
6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.
—
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your
player is connected to a digital input on the AV
receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream
has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,
or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver
doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such
cases, you may hear noise.
—
—
Depending on the source and current listening mode, 35
not much sound may be produced by the surround
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is 35-39
modes.
50
■ The center speaker produces no sound
■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the center speaker produces no sound.
—
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
produce a short audible noise. This is not a
malfunction.
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.
59
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
50
If the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted to high positive values, then the
maximum master volume possible may be reduced.
Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set
automatically after the Audyssey 2EQ® Room
Correction and Speaker Setup has been performed.
32, 51
■ The front high and surround back speakers
produce no sound
■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound 36
may be produced by the front high and surround back
speakers. Select another listening mode.
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio
signals, audio output may not start immediately.
—
■ Noise can be heard
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the
front high and surround back speakers may be weak.
—
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and the like may degrade the
audio performance, so refrain from doing it.
—
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
50
En-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via
HDMI OUT, on-screen menus are not displayed.
—
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet
with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may
not work reliably when the doors are closed.
—
Video
■ There’s no picture
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote
controller mode.
10, 70
in all the way.
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen display 43
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN
is output to a device connected to HDMI OUT.
When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
not work as expected.
—
Make sure that each video component is properly
connected.
15, 16
48
If your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT, select
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setup to watch
composite video, and component video sources.
code.
Tuner
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 63
and remote controller.
If the video source is connected to a component video 16, 49
input, you must assign that input to an input selector,
and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI
OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
■ Can’t control other components
Relocate your antenna.
—
—
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or
computer.
If the video source is connected to a composite video 16
input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT
or the corresponding composite video output.
17
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Listen to the station in mono.
30
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector, and
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT.
15, 48
When listening to an AM station, operating the
remote controller may cause noise.
—
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote
controller mode.
10, 70
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
—
—
—
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the
TV/CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or
GAME IN jacks, for the remote controller to work
properly, you must set the input display
appropriately.
41
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
—
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
■ There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code.
68
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is 88
not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC
are not guaranteed.
To control another manufacturer’s component, point 69
the remote controller at that component.
■ The remote controller doesn’t work
Before operating this unit, be sure to press
RECEIVER.
—
4
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via 70
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver.
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
first.
When the resolution is set to any resolution not
supported by the TV, no video is output from the
HDMI outputs.
48
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the
correct polarity.
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the
AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV
does not support the current video resolution and you
need to select another resolution on your DVD
player.
—
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of
batteries, or old and new batteries.
4
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected 70
via u, point the remote controller at the component.
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
first.
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor.
4
The entered remote control code may not be correct.
If more than one code is listed, try each one.
—
■ The on-screen menus don’t appear
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.
—
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
—
En-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my
iPod/iPhone as the input source
If you download or copy large files on your
computer, playback may be interrupted. Try closing
—
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
any unused programs, use a more powerful computer,
or use a dedicated server.
■ There’s no sound
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting
Direct Change function may select your iPod/iPhone
as the input source by mistake during the transition
between tracks.
—
—
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.
—
—
If the server is serving large music files to several
networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the
network, upgrade your network, or use a switch
instead of a hub.
—
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in
the Dock.
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct
input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
—
■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
—
—
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.
■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
■ There’s no video
Zone 2
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
the “Network” screen.
62
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT
setting is set to On.
—
—
—
■ There’s no sound
Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2.
—
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or
the AV receiver.
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output
video.
Check the “Network” settings.
62
■ The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound
Zone 2 speakers can be used when the “Powered
Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”.
50
USB Device Playback
■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control my iPod/iPhone
■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in
the Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not
connect properly to the Dock. Always remove your
iPod/iPhone from the case before inserting it into the
Dock.
—
Music Server and Internet Radio
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
—
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support 90
the USB mass storage device class. However,
playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
89
—
90
62
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s
displaying the Apple logo.
—
Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
USB memory devices with security functions cannot
be played.
—
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
67
Make sure the server is up and running and
compatible with the AV receiver.
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller,
point it toward your AV receiver.
—
Check the “Network” settings.
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start
playback by pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play
button. Remote operation should then be possible.
—
■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
—
—
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver.
90
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may
not work as expected.
En-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on
the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the above
process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the AV
receiver’s display and release the buttons.
Others
■ Standby power consumption
standby mode may reach up to a maximum of 8.3 W:
– The “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to
“On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV
receiver will enter standby mode as usual.)
– The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than
“Off”.
60, 62
These functions don’t work when Zone 2 is turned
on.
17
■ When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,
the measurement fails and the message
“Ambient noise is too high.” is displayed.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
back in.
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
—
– The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.
■ The sound changes when I connect my
headphones
■ The following settings can be made for the
composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
settings.
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the input
source that you want to set and the SETUP button
simultaneously. While holding down the input selector
button, press SETUP until “Video ATT :On” appears
on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To turn the setting off, repeat the above process so that
“Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV receiver’s
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, CBL/SAT,
GAME, PC, AUX or USB input.
If you have a game console connected to the composite
video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can
attenuate the gain.
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono or Direct.
—
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental
fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit’s
malfunction. Before you record important data, make
sure that the material will be recorded correctly.
■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
The values entered may be automatically adjusted
with values best-suited for your home theater.
—
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.
■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
menu to select “Main” or “Sub”.
■ The ufunctions don’t work
17
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the
component and AV receiver, even if they are
connected digitally.
Video ATT :Off: (default).
Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
17
While Zone 2 is selected, the ufunctions don’t
work.
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to
the HDMI OUT is unstable, try switching the
DeepColor function off
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously
press the GAME and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on the
AV receiver. While holding down GAME, press
En-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Important Note Regarding Video Playback
The AV receiver can upconvert component video and
composite video sources for display on a TV connected to
the HDMI OUT. However, if the picture quality of the
source is poor, upconversion may make the picture worse
or disappear altogether.
In this case, try the following:
If the video source is connected to a component
video input, connect your TV to COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
1
If the video source is connected to a composite video
input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V.
On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,
and then select “Component Video Input”
2
(➔ page 49).
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN1”.
If the video source is connected to a composite video
input, select the relevant input selector, and assign it to
“- - - - -”.
Tip
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to
“Direct” (➔ page 56).
En-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Updating the Firmware via Network
Limitation of liability
Firmware Update
The program and accompanying online documentation
are furnished to you for use at your own risk. Onkyo will
not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages
for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your
use of the program or the accompanying online
documentation, regardless of legal theory, and whether
arising in tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be
liable to you or any third party for any special, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,
including, but not limited to, compensation,
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using
network connection on the rear panel.
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can choose
from the following two methods: update via network, or
update via USB storage. Choose the one that best suits
your environment. Before proceeding with the update,
please read the corresponding explanations carefully.
Note
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an
Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver.
updated.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is
finished.
■ Update via network
You need a wired Internet connection to update the
firmware.
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 81)
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash
memory stick. You need at least 32 MB of available
space to update the firmware.
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of
present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for any
other reason whatsoever.
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.
Note
• Check the network connection before updating.
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver
during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated as an
independent device.
Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 60).
• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet
cable.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver may take
a while to read it.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes
the ability to power them.
To be continued
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage
of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV
receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port, Onkyo
recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported.
Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.
En-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Case 2:
Update Procedure
Troubleshooting
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.
Case 1:
Press RECEIVERfollowed by HOMEon the remote
controller.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front
display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following
table and take appropriate action.
1
Case 3:
If you do not have an Internet connection to the network,
please contact Onkyo Support (➔ page 82).
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
2
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is
turned on. Please wait until it becomes operable.
■ Errors during an update via network
Error Code
Description
*
*-10, -20
The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Reconnect the cable properly.
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.
3
Note that this option will not be available if there is no
firmware file newer than the currently installed
version.
*
*
*-11, -13, -21, Internet connection error.
*-28
Check the following items:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway address, and DNS server are
configured properly.
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
4
• Make sure the router is turned on.
During the update process, the on-screen display may
disappear depending on the updated program. When
this occurs, you can still view the update progress on
the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will
reappear after the update is complete, and upon
turning the AV receiver off and on again.
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router are
connected with an Ethernet cable.
• Make sure your router is configured properly.
See the instruction manual of the router.
• If your network allows only one client
connection and there is any other device
already connected, the AV receiver will not be
able to access the network. Consult your
Internet Service Provider (ISP).
• If your modem does not function as a router,
you will need a router. Depending on your
network, you may need to configure the proxy
server if necessary. See the document
provided by your ISP. If you are still unable to
access the Internet, the DNS or proxy server
may be temporarily down. Contact your ISP.
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has
been completed.
5
Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on
6
the front panel.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.
Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically
turn on again.
Others
Retry the update procedure from the beginning.
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo
Support (➔ page 82) and provide the error
code.
Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware
installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
En-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Update Procedure
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
Updating the Firmware via USB
10
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a
USB device.
During the update process, the on-screen display may
disappear depending on the updated program. When
this occurs, you can still view the update progress on
the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will
reappear after the update is complete, and upon
turning the AV receiver off and on again.
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is any
data in the USB device, remove it first.
1
Note
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web
site. The file name is as follows:
2
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
process.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the
update process.
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware
file or the AC power cord during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is
finished.
ONKAVR****_************.zip
Unzip the downloaded file. The following three files
are created:
ONKAVR****_************.of1
ONKAVR****_************.of2
ONKAVR****_************.of3
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not remove the
USB device during the update process.
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has
been completed.
11
12
Remove the USB device.
Copy the extracted files to the USB device. Be
careful not to copy the zip file.
3
Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on
Remove the USB device from your PC and connect
it to the USB port on the AV receiver.
the front panel.
4
Before Starting
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.
Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically
turn on again.
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 60).
• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet
cable.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on.
5
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the
front display.
Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware
installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Select the USB input source.
6
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display and then the name of the USB device is
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize the
USB device.
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.
Press RECEIVERfollowed by HOMEon the remote
controller.
7
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
8
9
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.
Note that this option will not be available if there is no
firmware file newer than the currently installed
version.
En-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Case 1:
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front
display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following
table and take appropriate action.
The Americas
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600
■ Errors during an update via USB
Fax: 201-785-2650
Hours:M-F 9am-5pm ET
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Error Code
Description
*
*-10, -20
The USB device was not detected. Make sure
the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the USB
storage device has its own power supply, use it
to power the USB device.
1-800-229-1687
Hours:M-F 9am-8pm / Sat-Sun 10am-8pm ET
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
*-14
The firmware file was not found in the root
folder of the USB device, or the firmware file is
on the support page of the web site, following
the on-site instructions. If the error persists,
please contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
Europe
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
China, Hong Kong
Others
Retry the update procedure from the beginning.
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo
Support and provide the error code.
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim
Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.onkyochina.com
Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo
SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/firmware/index.html
The above-mentioned information is subject to change
without prior notice. Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest
update.
En-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Signal Selection
Video Connection Formats
Connection Tips and
Video Signal Path
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, component video, composite video.
However, for component video only, regardless of whether
a component video signal is actually present, if a
component video input is assigned to the input selector,
that component video input will be selected. And if no
component video input is assigned to the input selector,
this will be interpreted as no component video signal being
present.
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video
inputs. However, the HDMI signal is automatically
selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI
outputs.
Video components can be connected by using any one of
the following video connection formats: composite video,
component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best
picture quality.
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for
compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The
format you choose will depend on the formats supported by
your components. Use the following sections as a guide.
Tip
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to
“Direct” (➔ page 56).
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display
when changing settings.
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video and component video
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output.
The composite video and component video outputs carry
their respective input signals as they are.
When you connect a video component to an HDMI or
COMPONENT input, you must assign that input to an
input selector (➔ page 48).
Signal Selection Example
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Composite
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
Composite
Component
HDMI
HDMI
AV receiver
IN
MONITOR OUT
AV receiver
Composite
Component
MONITOR OUT
Composite
Component
TV, projector, etc.
TV, projector, etc.
En-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Audio Connection Formats
Audio components can be connected by using any of the
following audio connection formats: analog, optical,
coaxial, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the
AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for
analog line outputs and vice versa.
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, digital, analog.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Analog
Optical
Coaxial
HDMI
HDMI
IN
*1
*1
*1
AV receiver
OUT
*1
*2
TV, projector, etc.
*1
*2
Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔ page 60).
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to
“Auto” (➔ page 61), the TV/CD input selector is selected,
and your TV is ARC capable.
Tip
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input
selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the case of an
optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL indicator lights. In
the case of an analog connection, neither of the HDMI and
DIGITAL indicators light.
En-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
NTSC
✔: Output available
Output
HDMI
4K*1
✔
Component
Composite
480i
s
Input
HDMI
1080p/24 1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Component
Composite
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
480i
✔
*1
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 24/25/30 Hz], [4096 × 2160 24 Hz]
En-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Operations that can be performed with
Using an RIHD-
compatible TV, Player,
or Recorder
p, which stands for Remote Interactive over
HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on
Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows
system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI
standard. CEC provides interoperability between various
components, however, operation with components other
than p-compatible components cannot be
guaranteed.
About p-compatible components
■ TV
• Toshiba TV
• Sharp TV
pconnection
The following components are p-compatible (As
■ For p-compatible TV
of January 2012).
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting
the AV receiver to an p-compatible TV.
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is
■ Players/Recorders
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output
the audio from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
• Toshiba players and recorders
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or
auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV
receiver. (A connection such as an optical digital cable or
similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable.)
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote
controller of the TV.
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used together
with Sharp TV)
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the
AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller
of the TV.
Note
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more p-
compatible components than the quantities specified below, to
the HDMI input terminal.
■ For p-compatible players/recorders
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting
the AV receiver to an p-compatible
player/recorder.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up to
three.
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
player/recorder that is playing back.
– Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
amplifier via HDMI.
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
p-compatible components than the above-mentioned
quantities are connected.
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using the
remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be
available.
To be continued
En-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ How to connect and setup
Change each item in the “HDMI” menu according
to the following settings:
• HDMI Control(RIHD): On
• Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto
See details of each setting (➔ pages 60, 61).
Operate with the remote controller.
For buttons that can be operated (➔ page 71).
2
3
4
Confirm the connection and settings.
1. Connect the HDMI OUT jack to the HDMI input
1
Note
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending
on the player models.)
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-
do the corresponding operations on the TV.
jack of the TV.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Confirm the settings.
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the
power of the connected components is turned off
automatically with the link operation.
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder.
HDMI
connection
AV receiver
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio
control compatible components, do not connect the u
cable at the same time.
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder, and verify the following:
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
selects the input to which the Blu-ray
DIGITAL AUDIO
connection
(OPTICAL)
HDMI
connection
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
Disc/DVD player/recorder is connected.
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected.
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the
TV speakers.
TV, projector, etc.
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
output audio from the TV.
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
depending on the component model connected. In such
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.
2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the
OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an
optical digital cable.
Note
• When the audio return channel (ARC) function is used with
an ARC capable TV, this connection is not necessary
(➔ page 61).
3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack
of the AV receiver.
Note
Note
• It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting
the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks
(➔ page 48). Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD
selector at this time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer
Electronics Control) operation will not be guaranteed.
• Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver
for the first time, when the settings of each component are
changed, when the main power of each component is turned
off, when the power cable is disconnected from the power
supply, or when there has been a power outage.
En-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Supported Audio Formats
About Copyright Protection
About HDMI
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS-HD Master Audio)
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV,
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new
digital interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors,
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video
components. Until now, several separate video and audio
cables have been required to connect AV components.
With HDMI, a single cable can carry control signals,
digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-
channel PCM, multichannel digital audio, and
*2
Content Protection) , a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver
via HDMI must also support HDCP.
*1
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support HDMI
output of the above audio formats.
*3
standard set by the DDWG in 1999.
*2
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
video encryption technology developed by Intel for
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and requires
a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible
with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-
DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
*1
*3
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon
Image, this open industry group’s objective is to address the
industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification
for high-performance PCs and digital displays.
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
*2
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible
components can display the picture.
Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual
Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be
connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that
DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a
separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with
such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from
a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be
restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is
poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI,
check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction
manual for details.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the
following:
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip
Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multichannel PCM.
En-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet
connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings
automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually,
see “Network” (➔ page 62).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have
a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoE-
compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server
to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a
proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver
(➔ page 62).
Network Requirements
Network/USB Features
■ Ethernet Network
Connecting to the Network
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play
music on a computer that’s connected to the network
wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it is
recommended to use wired connections.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV
receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
■ Ethernet Router
Internet radio
A router manages the network, data-routing and supplying
of IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP
supplies IP addresses to the network devices, allowing
them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is
recommended.
Modem
Router
WAN
LAN
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some Internet
Service Providers (ISP) require you to use specific routers.
Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re
unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
Computer or media server
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results,
so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g.,
cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please consult your ISP
or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Note
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband
Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web.
En-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Minimum system requirements for Windows Media
Player 11 on Windows XP
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP
Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition
(SP2), Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup
for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Server Requirements
USB Device Requirements
■ Server playback
• USB mass storage device class (but not always
guaranteed).
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section
will be treated as an independent device.
be nested up to 16 levels deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Player 12
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• DLNA-certified media server
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
If the operating system of your computer is Windows
Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.
Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be
downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
Memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
64 MB
Note
200 MB of free space
CD or DVD drive
28.8 kbps
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No
Storage” will be displayed.
Modem:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB
port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the
USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB devices to
be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or
software. Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer to your USB MP3 player’s
instruction manual for details.
Sound card:
Monitor:
Video card:
Software:
16-bit sound card
Super VGA (800 x 600)
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may
be nested up to 16 levels deep.
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket
PC or smartphone)
Note
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used
with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back up your
important music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special
music software are not supported.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes
the ability to power them.
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB device
must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver make
take a while to read it.
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
■ Remote playback
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller device.
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction
manual for details.
If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed.
For more information, see the Microsoft web site.
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.
En-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)
Supported Audio File Formats
About DLNA
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
For server playback and playback from a USB device, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats.
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly.
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop a
concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks
where digital content such as photos, music, and videos can
be shared through consumer electronics, personal
computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home.
The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5.
Note
■ AAC
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the
following music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis.
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file formats
may not be played depending on the server type.
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/
.3GP or .3G2)
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and
320 kbps are supported.
■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)
®
using Windows Media Player.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, bitrates of
between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA DRM are
supported.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz
are supported.
*
Only for playback via network.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
En-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
License and Trademark
Information
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for
the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued
& pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone
may affect wireless performance.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc.
U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey 2EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® are
registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.
“HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.”
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.”
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft
group of companies.
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates.
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
En-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Video Outputs
Video Section
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Component
Composite
OUT
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
MONITOR OUT
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)
■ Audio Inputs
Digital
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB
Rated Output Power
All channels:
80 watts minimum continuous power per
Optical: 2
Coaxial: 2
channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels driven
from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a maximum
total harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
130 watts minimum continuous power per
channel, 6 ohm loads, 1 channel driven at
1 kHz, with a maximum total harmonic
distortion of 1%
Analog
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, TV/CD,
AUX
Tuner Section
■ Audio Outputs
FM Tuning Frequency Range
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
AM Tuning Frequency Range
530 kHz - 1710 kHz
40
Analog
ZONE2 LINE OUT
2
*
Dynamic Power
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
*
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power
180 W (3 Ω, Front)
160 W (4 Ω, Front)
100 W (8 Ω, Front)
Preset Channel
Speaker Outputs
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL/FHL,
SBR/FHR) + ZONE2 (L, R)
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)
General
Phones
1 (6.3 ø)
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
■ Others
Damping Factor
Power Supply
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
2 V/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (DSP bypass)
Tone Control Characteristics
Power Consumption 5 A
No-sound Power Consumption
65 W
Setup Mic
RI
USB
1
1
1 (Front)
1
Stand-by Power Consumption
0.15 W
Ethernet
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.
435 mm × 173.5 mm × 328 mm
17-1/8" × 6-13/16" × 12-15/16"
Weight
9.0 kg (19.8 lbs.)
10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
■ HDMI
Signal to Noise Ratio 100 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance
6 Ω - 16 Ω
Input
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7
Output
OUT
Video Resolution
Audio Format
1080p
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
Supported
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD)
■ Video Inputs
Component
Composite
IN 1
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX
En-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
http://www.onkyo.com/
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK
Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.onkyochina.com/
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJin Road, Jin an, Shanghai,
China 200041, Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/
Y1203-1
SN 29401099EN
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 0 9 9 E N *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
n
7.1ch Home Theater Speaker Package
HTP-791
Surround speakers (SKR-780)
Surround back speakers (SKB-780)
Keyhole slots
Speaker terminals
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories.
SKC-791
Front speakers (SKF-791)
Keyhole slot
(Blue)
(Gray)
Surround speakers
Speaker terminals
(Brown)
(Tan)
(White)
Speaker cables 10 ft. (3.0 m)
(Red)
SKR-780/SKB-780
Surround back
speakers
Speaker cables 26 ft. (8.0 m)
Front speakers
Caution
Powered subwoofer (SKW-791)
• The front grilles are not designed to be removed so do not
attempt to remove them forcibly, as this will damage
them.
2 speaker bases and
8 screws
■ Front
Status indicator
RCA cable 10 ft. (3.0 m)
Center speaker (SKC-791)
Off: Subwoofer in standby mode or
disconnected from power source
Blue: Subwoofer on
With the Auto Standby function, the
SKW-791 automatically turns on when an
input signal is detected in standby mode.
When there’s no input signal for a while,
the SKW-791 automatically enters
Subwoofer
4 floor pads
(Green)
Speaker cable 10 ft. (3.0 m)
Part Names
Center speaker
SKW-791
standby mode.
4 cork stoppers*1
■ Rear
*1
OUTPUT LEVEL control
This control is used to adjust the
volume of the subwoofer.
Configuration of the cork stoppers may be different from the
figure, such as being 2 sheets instead of 1 sheet, but the total
number will be same.
Speaker terminals
LINE INPUT
SKW-791
To AC outlet
This RCA input should be connected
to the subwoofer pre out on your AV
receiver with supplied RCA cable.
SKF-791
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Be sure to tighten the screws when you attach the speaker
bases.
• Attach the speaker bases on a flat, level, and stable floor.
• After you attach the speaker bases, make sure that the
speakers stand upright and are stable.
Setting the Subwoofer Level
Note
• The Auto Standby function turns the subwoofer on when the
input signal exceeds a certain level. If the Auto Standby function
does not work reliably, try slightly increasing or decreasing the
subwoofer output level on your receiver.
To set the level of the subwoofer, use the
OUTPUT LEVEL control. Set it so that bass
sounds are evenly balanced with the treble sounds
from the other speakers. Because our ears are less
sensitive to very low bass sounds, there’s a temptation to
set the level of the subwoofer too high. As a rule of thumb,
set the subwoofer level to what you think is the optimal
level, and then back it off slightly.
Using the Cork Stoppers for a More Stable
Platform
Before Using the Home Theater
Speaker Package
We recommend using the supplied cork stoppers to achieve
the best possible sound from your speakers. The cork
stoppers prevent the speakers from moving, providing a
more stable platform. Use cork stoppers for the center
speaker.
Attaching the Speaker Bases
Wall Mounting
Before you connect the speakers, attach the supplied
speaker base to each SKF-791.
1. Turn the speaker upside down with the protection
cover attached.
To mount the center speaker horizontally, use the two
keyhole slots shown to hang the speaker on two screws that
are securely screwed into the wall.
Cork stoppers
2. Align the speaker base while the arrow mark
is
Keyhole slots for wall mounting
headed in the same direction as the speaker’s face.
Be careful not to tip over the speaker.
3. Align the screw holes on the speaker base with those
on the bottom of each speaker, and affix the speaker
base using the supplied screws. Recommended torque
is 9 lbf·in (10 kgf·cm).
Bottom of the
SKC-791
SKC-791
7-7/8" (200 mm)
Be careful not to tip over the speaker.
4. Turn the speaker right side up.
5. Remove the protection cover.
Tip
Using the Floor Pads for Subwoofer
• If the center speaker is tilted, loosen the screw on the declined
side to move upward so that the speaker could be adjusted
vertically.
If the subwoofer is placed on a hard floor (wood, vinyl,
tile, etc.) and playback is very loud, the subwoofer’s feet
may damage the flooring. To prevent this, place the
supplied pads underneath the subwoofer’s feet. The pads
also provide a stable base for the subwoofer.
Supplied screws
Arrow mark
Top of
SKF-791
To mount the surround/surround back speakers vertically,
use the keyhole slot shown to hang each speaker on a screw
that's securely screwed into the wall.
Speaker base
Protection
Bottom of
SKF-791
cover
Keyhole slots for
wall mounting
Safety Precautions
SKR-780/SKB-780
• Attach the speaker bases in a manner that will not allow
the speakers to tip over.
Pad
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage your amp.
d Surround back left and right speakers (SKB-780)
These speakers further enhance the realism of surround
sound and improve sound localization behind the
listener.
Caution
• A mounting screw’s ability to support a
speaker depends on how well it’s
anchored to the wall. If you have
hollow walls, screw each mounting
screw into a stud. If there are no studs,
or the walls are solid, use suitable wall
anchors. Use screws with a head
diameter of 5/16" (9 mm) or less and a shank diameter of
1/8" (4 mm) or less. With hollow walls, use a cable/pipe
detector to check for any power cables or water pipes
before making any holes.
Wall
Note
• When you connect the front high left and right speakers, prepare
for it separately, or use the surround back left and right speakers.
Position them behind the listener about 2 to 3 feet (60
to 100 cm) above ear level.
Powered
subwoofer
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
3/16" to 7/16"
(5 to 10 mm)
e Subwoofer (SKW-791)
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the LFE
(Low-Frequency Effects) channel and bass from the
satellite speakers when a crossover is specified. The
volume and quality of the bass output from your
subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of
your listening room, and your listening position. In
general, a good bass sound can be obtained by
installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-
third the way along the front wall, as shown.
Center speaker
Green
White
Red
• Leave a gap of between 3/16" (5 mm) and 7/16" (10 mm)
between the wall and the base of the screw head, as
shown (We recommend that you consult a home
installation professional).
e a
b
*
Enjoying Home Theater
Using the supplied
RCA cable, connect
the subwoofer’s
LINE INPUT to
your AV receiver’s
SUBWOOFER
The Home Theater means that you can enjoy surround
sound with a real sense of movement in your own home —
just like being in a movie theater or concert hall.
Gray
Blue
Tan
Brown
a Front left and right speakers (SKF-791)
They should be positioned facing the listener at about
ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them
inward slightly so as to create a triangle, with the
listener at the apex.
PRE OUT jack.
Surround
Surround Surround Surround
1/3 of wall
position
Corner
position
back left
back right
left
right
c
d
speaker
speaker
speaker
speaker
Caution
Connecting the Speakers
• With other audio-video components, connect the
b Center speaker (SKC-791)
subwoofer’s LINE INPUT to the subwoofer pre out jack
of your equipment. Never plug any kind of musical
instrument to the subwoofer.
Position it close to your TV (preferably on top) facing
forward at about ear level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Speaker Connection Precautions
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• Turn off your receiver before making any connections.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity.
Connect positive (+) terminals to only
c Surround left and right speakers (SKR-780)
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly
behind, about 2 to 3 feet (60 to 100 cm) above ear
level. Ideally they should be equally spaced from the
listener.
positive (+) terminals, and negative (–)
terminals to only negative (–) terminals. If the
speakers are wired incorrectly, the sound will be out of
phase and will sound unnatural.
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Center Speaker (SKC-791)
Note
Specifications
Type
Impedance
2 Way Bass-reflex
6 Ω
For non-magnetic shielded speakers:
■ Powered Subwoofer (SKW-791)
Try moving the speakers away from your TV or monitor. If
discoloration should occur, turn off your TV or monitor,
wait 15 to 30 minutes, and then turn it back on again. This
normally activates the degaussing function, which
neutralizes the magnetic field, thereby removing any
Maximum input power 130 W
Type
Input sensitivity/Impedance
540 mV/20 kΩ
Bass-reflex
Sensitivity
79 dB/W/m
Frequency response
Crossover frequency
Cabinet capacity
60 Hz-50 kHz
4 kHz
0.1 cubic feet (2.8 L)
Rated output Power (FTC)
120 watts minimum continuous power,
4 ohms, driven at 100 Hz with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of
1 %
Dimensions (W × H × D) 16-9/16" × 4-1/2" × 4-11/16"
420 mm × 115 mm × 119 mm
(incl. grille and projection)
Weight
Drivers unit
4.9 lbs. (2.2 kg)
3-1/4" (8 cm) Cone Woofer × 2
1" (2.5 cm) Balanced Dome × 1
Spring type color coded
Available
Fixed
Frequency response
Cabinet capacity
Dimensions (W × H × D) 10-13/16" × 19-15/16" × 17-1/4"
275 mm × 507 mm × 438 mm
25 Hz to 150 Hz
1.3 cubic feet (37 L)
Terminal
Keyhole slot
Grille
(incl. projection)
Weight
21.4 lbs. (9.7 kg)
1 (RCA analog mono)
10" (25 cm) Cone Woofer × 1
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
35 W
Audio Input
Drivers unit
Power supply
Power consumption
Other
Other
Non-magnetic shielding
■ Surround/Surround Back Speakers
(SKR-780/SKB-780)
Auto Standby function
Non-magnetic shielding
Type
Impedance
Full Range Closed Box
6 Ω
Maximum input power 130 W
■ Front Speakers (SKF-791)
Sensitivity
81 dB/W/m
Type
Impedance
2 Way Bass-reflex
6 Ω
Frequency response
Cabinet capacity
80 Hz-20 kHz
0.036 cubic feet (1.0 L)
Maximum input power 130 W
Dimensions (W × H × D) 4-1/2" × 9-1/16" × 3-3/4"
115 mm × 230 mm × 96 mm
Sensitivity
79.5 dB/W/m
Frequency response
Crossover frequency
Cabinet capacity
55 Hz-50 kHz
4 kHz
0.26 cubic feet (7.3 L)
(incl. grille and projection)
2.2 lbs. (1.0 kg)
3-1/4" (8 cm) Cone Speaker × 1
Spring type color coded
Available
Weight
Drivers unit
Terminal
Keyhole slot
Grille
Assembly dimensions (with supplied speaker base) (W × H × D)
10-5/16" × 41-1/8" × 10-5/16"
262 mm × 1045 mm × 262 mm
(incl. projection)
11.5 lbs. (5.2 kg)
(incl. speaker base)
Fixed
Other
Non-magnetic shielding
Weight
Specifications and appearance are subject to change
without prior notice.
Drivers unit
3-1/4" (8 cm) Cone Woofer × 2
1" (2.5 cm) Balanced Dome × 1
Terminal
Grille
Spring type color coded
Fixed
Other
Non-magnetic shielding
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
r
Ensemble d’enceintes du Home cinéma 7.1 can.
HTP-791
Enceintes surround (SKR-780)
Enceintes surround arrière (SKB-780)
Encoches en trou de serrure Bornes d’enceinte
Accessoires fournis
Assurez-vous que le carton contient bien les accessoires
suivants.
SKC-791
Enceintes avant (SKF-791)
Encoche en
trou de serrure
(Bleu)
(Gris)
Enceintes surround
Bornes d’enceinte
(Marron)
(Marron clair)
SKR-780/SKB-780
Enceintes surround
arrière
Câbles d’enceinte 8,0 m
(Blanc)
Câbles d’enceinte 3,0 m
(Rouge)
Mise en garde
Enceintes avant
Subwoofer amplifié (SKW-791)
•
Les grilles avant ne sont pas faites pour être retirées, aussi
n’essayez pas de les retirer de force, car ceci les endommagera.
■ Avant
Indicateur d’état
2 bases d’enceintes et 8 vis
Off : subwoofer en mode veille ou
débranché de la source
Câble RCA 3,0 m
Enceinte centrale (SKC-791)
d’alimentation
Bleu : subwoofer allumé
Grâce à la fonction de mise en veille
automatique, la SKW-791 s’allume
automatiquementlorsqu’un signal d’entrée
est détecté en mode Veille. Lorsqu’aucun
signal d’entrée n’est transmis pendant un
certain temps, la SKW-791 passe
automatiquement en mode Veille.
Subwoofer
4 tampons de protection
(Vert)
Câble d’enceinte 3,0 m
Noms des pièces
Enceinte centrale
SKW-791
4 bouchons en liège*1
■ Arrière
Bouton OUTPUT LEVEL
Ce bouton sert à régler le volume
sonore du subwoofer.
*1
La configuration des bouchons en liège peut être différente de
la figure, en comportant par exemple 2 feuilles au lieu d’une,
mais leur nombre total est identique.
LINE INPUT
Cette entrée RCA doit être branchée à la
pré-sortie du subwoofer de votre ampli-
tuner AV à l’aide du câble RCA fourni.
Bornes d’enceinte
SKW-791
Vers la prise murale
SKF-791
Fr-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Assurez-vous de serrer les vis lorsque vous fixez les bases
d’enceintes.
• Fixez les bases d’enceintes sur un sol plat, égal et stable.
• Après avoir fixé les bases d’enceintes, assurez-vous que
les enceintes tiennent bien droit et qu’elles sont stables.
Réglage du niveau sonore du subwoofer
Remarque
• La fonction de mise en veille automatique allume le subwoofer
lorsque le signal d’entrée dépasse un certain niveau. Si la fonction
de mise en veille automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement,
essayez d’augmenter ou de diminuer légèrement le niveau de
sortie du subwoofer de votre récepteur.
Pour régler le niveau sonore du subwoofer, utilisez
le bouton OUTPUT LEVEL. Réglez-le de façon à
ce que les basses soient équilibrées avec les aigus
provenant des autres enceintes. Étant donné que
nos oreilles sont moins sensibles aux basses très faibles,
vous pouvez être tenté de régler le niveau sonore du
subwoofer trop haut. En règle générale, réglez le niveau
sonore du subwoofer au niveau que vous estimez être
optimal, et diminuez-le légèrement.
Utiliser les bouchons en liège pour une
meilleure stabilité
Avant d’utiliser l’Ensemble d’enceintes
du Home cinéma
Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser les bouchons en liège
fournis pour obtenir le meilleur son possible de vos
enceintes. Les bouchons en liège empêchent les enceintes
de bouger, en procurant une meilleure stabilité. Utilisez les
bouchons en liège pour l’enceinte centrale.
Mise en place des bases d’enceintes
Fixation au mur
Avant de brancher les enceintes, mettez en place chacune
des bases d’enceintes à chaque SKF-791.
1. Retournez l’enceinte en laissant la protection en place.
2. Alignez la base d’enceinte, la flèche
face avant de l’enceinte.
Pour fixer l’enceinte centrale de façon horizontale, utilisez
les deux encoches en trou de serrure indiquées pour
accrocher l’enceinte à deux vis bien fixées au mur.
Bouchons en liège
dirigée vers la
Dessous de la
SKC-791
Encoche en trou de serrure pour la fixation au mur
Veillez à ne pas faire basculer l’enceinte.
3. Alignez les trous des vis de la base d’enceinte avec
ceux situés sous chaque enceinte, et fixez la base
d’enceinte à l’aide des vis fournies. Le couple
recommandé est 10 kgf·cm.
Veillez à ne pas faire basculer l’enceinte.
4. Retournez l’enceinte.
SKC-791
200 mm
Utilisation des tampons de protection pour
le subwoofer
Conseil
5. Retirez la protection.
• Si l’enceinte centrale est inclinée, dévissez la vis du côté incliné
pour régler la position verticale de l’enceinte et la redresser.
Si le subwoofer est placé sur un sol dur (bois, vinyle, carrelage,
etc.) et si le niveau sonore de la lecture est élevé, les pieds du
subwoofer peuvent endommager le sol. Pour empêcher ceci,
placez les tampons fournis sous les pieds du subwoofer. Les
tampons fournissent également une base stable au subwoofer.
Vis fournies
Flèche
Pour fixer les enceintes surround/surround arrière de façon
verticale, utilisez l’encoche en trou de serrure pour
accrocher chaque enceinte sur une vis bien vissée au mur
Dessusdela
SKF-791
Base d’enceinte
Protection
Dessous de la
SKF-791
Encoche en trou
de serrure pour la
fixation au mur
Précautions de sécurité
SKR-780/SKB-780
• Fixez les bases d’enceintes de façon à ce que les
enceintes ne puissent pas basculer.
Tampon
Fr-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Veillez à ne pas mettre ne pas mettre les fils positifs et
négatifs en court-circuit. Vous risqueriez d’endommager
votre amplificateur.
d Enceintes surround arrière gauche et
Mise en garde
droite (SKB-780)
• La capacité de la vis de fixation
permettant de supporter une enceinte
dépend de la façon dont elle est fixée
au mur. Si vos murs sont creux, vissez
chaque vis de fixation dans un montant.
S’il n’y a aucun montant, ou si les murs
sont pleins, utilisez des fixations
Mur
Ces enceintes renforcent encore plus le réalisme du son
surround et améliorent la localisation du son derrière
l’auditeur.
Placez-les derrière l’auditeur 60 à 100 cm environ au-
dessus du niveau des oreilles.
Remarque
• Lorsque vous branchez les enceintes avant hautes G/D, effectuez
la préparation du branchement d’une manière séparée, ou utilisez
les enceintes surround arrière G/D.
5 à 10 mm
e Subwoofer (SKW-791)
Subwoofer
amplifié
Enceinte
avant droite
Enceinte
avant gauche
murales adéquates. Utilisez des vis
Le subwoofer gère les graves du canal chargé des effets
LFE (effets basse fréquence) et les graves des enceintes
satellites lorsqu’un crossover est spécifié. Le volume et
la qualité des sons graves émis par le subwoofer
dépendent de sa position, de la forme de la pièce où le
système est installé et de votre position d’écoute. En
général, il est possible d’obtenir un bon son grave en
installant le subwoofer dans un coin situé devant
l’auditeur ou à environ un tiers de la largeur du mur (cf.
illustration).
dont la tête a un diamètre de 9 mm maximum et un
diamètre de la partie lisse de la tige de 4 mm maximum.
Pour les murs creux, utilisez un détecteur de
câbles/canalisations pour vérifier la présence éventuelle
de câbles d’alimentation ou de canalisations d’eau avant
d’effectuer des percements.
• Laissez un espace de 5 à 10 mm entre le mur et la base de
la tête de la vis, comme indiqué (Nous vous
recommandons de consulter un professionnel de
l’installation domestique).
Enceinte centrale
Vert
Blanc
Rouge
e a
b
Vivez une expérience
cinématographique à domicile
*
À l’aide du câble
RCA fourni,
branchez la borne
LINE INPUT du
subwoofer à la prise
SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT de votre ampli-
tuner AV.
Gris
Bleu
Marron
clair
Marron
Grâce au Home Cinema, vous pouvez profiter d’un son
surround très réaliste à votre domicile — comme si vous
étiez dans une salle de cinéma ou de concert.
1/3 de la
position murale angulaire
Position
Enceinte
surround
Enceinte
surround
Enceinte
surround surround
droite
Enceinte
a Enceintes avant gauche et droite (SKF-791)
Elles doivent être positionnées face à l’auditeur, à la
hauteur des oreilles et être situées à distance égale du
téléviseur. Orientez-les légèrement vers l’intérieur de
manière à créer un triangle avec l’auditeur.
c
d
arrière gauche arrière droite gauche
Branchement des enceintes
Mise en garde
• Avec d’autres composants audio-vidéo, raccordez l’LINE
INPUT du subwoofer à la prise pré-sortie du subwoofer
de votre équipement. Ne branchez jamais un instrument
de musique au subwoofer.
Précautions concernant le branchement des
enceintes
b Enceinte centrale (SKC-791)
Positionnez-la à proximité de votre téléviseur (de
préférence dessus), face à vous, à la hauteur des
oreilles ou à la même hauteur que les enceintes avant
gauche et droite.
Lisez ce qui suit avant de brancher vos enceintes :
Éteignez votre récepteur avant d’effectuer les branchements.
Faites très attention à respecter la polarité des
•
•
câbles de vos enceintes. Ne branchez les bornes
positives (+) que sur les bornes positives (+) et les
bornes négatives (–) que sur les bornes négatives
(–). Si les enceintes sont branchées de façon
c Enceintes surround gauche et droite (SKR-780)
Placez-les sur les côtés de l’auditeur, ou légèrement
derrière lui, 60 à 100 cm environ au-dessus du niveau
des oreilles. Idéalement, elles doivent se situer à égale
distance de l’auditeur.
incorrecte, le son sera déphasé et ne semblera pas naturel.
Fr-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Enceinte centrale (SKC-791)
Les caractéristiques techniques et l’apparence de cet
appareil sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
Caractéristiques techniques
Type
Impédance
Bass-reflex 2 canaux
6 Ω
■ Subwoofer amplifié (SKW-791)
Remarque
Puissance d’entrée maximale
130 W
79 dB/W/m
Type
Sensibilité/impédance d’entrée
540 mV / 20 kΩ
Puissance de sortie nominale (FTC)
Puissance continue de 120 watts
Bass-reflex
Pour enceintes blindées non magnétiques :
Essayez d’éloigner les enceintes de votre téléviseur ou de
votre moniteur. Si une décoloration se produit, éteignez
votre téléviseur ou votre moniteur, attendez 15 à 30
minutes, puis rallumez le téléviseur ou le moniteur. Ceci
active normalement la fonction de démagnétisation, qui
neutralise le champ magnétique, supprimant ainsi les effets
de décoloration.
Sensibilité
Distorsion de fréquence 60 Hz-50 kHz
Fréquence de crossover 4 kHz
minimum, 4 ohms, utilisant une fréquence
de 100 Hz avec une distorsion harmonique
totale maximale de 1%
Capacité du coffrage
0,1 pieds cubiques (2,8 L)
Dimensions (L × H × P) 16-9/16" × 4-1/2" × 4-11/16"
420 mm × 115 mm × 119 mm
Distorsion de fréquence 25 Hz à 150 Hz
Capacité du coffrage 1,3 pieds cubiques (37 L)
(y compris la grille et la projection)
Poids
4,9 lbs. (2,2 kg)
Dimensions (L × H × P) 10-13/16" × 19-15/16" × 17-1/4"
275 mm × 507 mm × 438 mm
Amplificateur
Woofer conique de 3-1/4" (8 cm) × 2
Dôme équilibré de 1" (2,5 cm) × 1
(y compris la projection)
Borne
À ressort et à code couleur
Poids
21,4 lbs. (9,7 kg)
Encoche en trou de serrure
Entrée audio
Amplificateur
Alimentation
Consommation
Autre
1 (mono analogique RCA)
Woofer conique de 10" (25 cm) × 1
120 V CA, 60 Hz
Disponible
Grille
Autre
Fixe
Protection non-magnétique
35 W
Fonction de mise en veille automatique
Protection non-magnétique
■ Enceintes surround/surround arrière
(SKR-780/SKB-780)
■ Enceintes avant (SKF-791)
Type
Large bande à coffrage fermé
Type
Bass-reflex 2 canaux
Impédance
6 Ω
Impédance
6 Ω
Puissance d’entrée maximale
130 W
81 dB/W/m
Distorsion de fréquence 80 Hz-20 kHz
Puissance d’entrée maximale
130 W
79,5 dB/W/m
Sensibilité
Sensibilité
Distorsion de fréquence 55 Hz-50 kHz
Fréquence de crossover 4 kHz
Capacité du coffrage
0,036 pieds cubiques (1,0 L)
Dimensions (L × H × P) 4-1/2" × 9-1/16" × 3-3/4"
115 mm × 230 mm × 96 mm
Capacité du coffrage
0,26 pieds cubiques (7,3 L)
Dimensions de l’ensemble (avec l’enceinte fournie) (L × H × P)
(y compris la grille et la projection)
10-5/16" × 41-1/8" × 10-5/16"
262 mm × 1045 mm × 262 mm
(y compris la projection)
11,5 lbs. (5,2 kg)
(y compris la base d’enceinte)
Poids
Amplificateur
Borne
2,2 lbs. (1,0 kg)
Cône d’enceinte de 3-1/4" (8 cm ) × 1
À ressort et à code couleur
Poids
Encoche en trou de serrure
Disponible
Fixe
Protection non-magnétique
Amplificateur
Woofer conique de 3-1/4" (8 cm) × 2
Dôme équilibré de 1" (2,5 cm) × 1
À ressort et à code couleur
Fixe
Grille
Autre
Borne
Grille
Autre
Protection non-magnétique
Y1203-1
SN 29400975-SP
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 0 9 7 5 - S P *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
®
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
Pandora internet radio –Getting Started
(U.S. only) ................................................. 2
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which
means you can freely switch between several logins.
After registering user accounts, login is performed from
the “Users” screen.
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3
Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Note
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio (North
American only) .........................................4
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or delete
an existing one.
Press NET.
1
A list of the network services appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7
Tip
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)
To play a station, use q/wto select the station from
your station list, and then press ENTER.
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
Create a New Station:
Enter the name of a song, artist, or genre and Pandora
will create a unique radio station for you based on the
musical qualities of that song, artist, or genre.
2
This will permanently delete a station from your
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback will be
lost should you choose to re-create the station with the
same song or artist.
Create station from this song:
Creates a radio station from this song.
Rename this station:
Lets you rename the current radio station.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your
profile on www.pandora.com.
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service that
plays the music you know and helps you discover music
you’ll love.
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account” or
1
■ Menu Items
I like this song:
Give a song “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play more
music like it.
I don’t like this song:
Give a song “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban that
song from the current station.
Why is this song playing?:
Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora
uses to create your personal radio stations.
Don’t play the song for a month:
If you are tired of a song, you can put the song to sleep
and Pandora will not play it for one month.
Create station from this artist:
Creates a radio station from this artist.
“I’m new to Pandora” and then press ENTER.
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on your
TV screen. Please write down this code. Go to an
Internet connected computer and point your browser
to www.pandora.com/onkyo
Bookmark this song:
Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow
you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one
step!
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Enter your activation code and then follow the
instructions to create your Pandora account and your
personalized Pandora Internet radio stations. You can
create your stations by entering your favorite songs
and artists when prompted. After you have created
your account and stations you can return to your
Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to
your personalized Pandora Internet radio.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can add
your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by
selecting “I have a Pandora Account” and logging in
with your email and password.
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora
Media, Inc. Used with permission.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select the menu, then press ENTER.
Search:
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER or
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)
2
3
1to start playback.
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account” and then
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track.
Music Guide:
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
1
press ENTER.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you don’t
have one yet, you can create a new account at
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists, Top
Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and Staff Picks.
Rhapsody Channels:
Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody’s
top-notch editors.
Playlists:
Play your own personal playlists.
My Library:
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,
RANDOM, REPEAT
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.
Enter your user name (usually your email) and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup.
Note
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t work.
■ Menu Items
Add track to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
Add album to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing albums.
Add playlist to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
Add channel to My Channels:
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
channels.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the
Rhapsody catalog using My Library.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.
4. Press ENTER.
Tip
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites list.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
Tip
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and Rhapsody
Channels from My Library.
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press ENTER.
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can sign
in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user name and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup. If you don’t know your username or password,
call Sirius XM at (888) 539-7474 for assistance.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)
1
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately
and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions (see
www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this agreement before
you purchase your subscription. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen shows how
many days are left in your trial. After the trial period
expires, if you want to continue listening to the service,
you must subscribe. To subscribe go to
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your computer.
and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your AV
receiver connected to the Internet. Using the remote
control, follow these steps:
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays the
category available for selection.
Use q/wto select the category and then press
2
3
ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then press
ENTER.
The playback screen for the selected channel appears
and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Menu Items
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and
then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a
free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs
you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,
you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,
share them with friends and see what they like, too.
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign
in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in the
next keyboard screen.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm
account today at www.last.fm/join
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet
Radio” screen appears.
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a
computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt
as your tastes change.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Artist Radio:
Use q/wto select menu and then press ENTER.
2
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music
inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve
heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
■ Using scrobbling control
Search Station:
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.
Top Artists Station:
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
• You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
Start your free trial straight away when you create your
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Using Slacker Personal Radio
6
If you do not have an account, create one on the
Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with your
computer.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6
Stores information to server, making it more likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Song:
1
■ Menu Items
Rate Song as Favorite:
If you already have a Slacker account, select “Sign
in to your account” and then press ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
information from the remote control or the keys on the
main unit.
Stores information to server, making it less likely that
the song will be played again.
If there are no mistakes in the information you have
entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK” then press
ENTER.
Ban Artist:
2
3
Stores information to server, making it less likely that
the songs from this artist will be played again.
Mark Favorite:
Adds the currently playing station to your favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
An account information confirmation screen appears.
If you do not have an account, select “Access
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a
restricted version of the service.
Deletes the currently playing station from your
favorites.
Note that use will be restricted.
Add song to Library:
Tip
Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Delete song from Library:
Deletes the currently playing track from your library.
Add to My Favorites:
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select a menu item and then press
4
5
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.
ENTER.
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from this
screen and then press ENTER.
The playback screen appears.
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
Using MP3tunes
5
6
Tip
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus
safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:
A playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes service as
described in “Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu”
(➔ page 1).
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
Creating an Account on your Computer
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and
■ Menu Items
1
then press ENTER.
Go to Menu:
From your computer, open a web browser and go
to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup
1
Displays additional menu options.
Enter the e-mail address and password you used
when creating your account, select “OK” and press
ENTER.
2
You can view or change your MP3tunes account
settings by going to www.mp3tunes.com/account.
Create an account.
2
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter your user
name and password from the remote controller or the
buttons on the AV receiver.
Click the Upload link (www.mp3tunes.com/upload)
to add files to your Locker.
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking on
Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).
4
If there are no mistakes in the information you have
entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen appears.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select the menu, then press ENTER.
4
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your
Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.
The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
®
Utilisation d’une
webradio
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes
Pandora internet Radio –Pour commencer
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
Procédures courantes dans le menu de
webradio
uniquement).............................................. 3
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est
affiché.
1
Remarque
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :
Add new user :
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la région.
Remove this user :
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.
Appuyez sur NET.
1
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le témoin
NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le câble
Ethernet est fermement branché sur l’ampli-tuner AV.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6
Conseil
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur
ENTER.
La page principale du service sélectionné s’affiche.
2
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord vous
déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez depuis
l’écran « Users ».
Fr-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Delete this station :
Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer (États-Unis
uniquement)
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour sélectionner
la station dans votre liste de stations, puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station de
votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous décideriez de
récréer la station avec les mêmes chansons ou les
mêmes artistes, tous vos acceptations/rejets précédents
seront perdus.
Create station from this song :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cette
chanson.
Rename this station :
Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle.
Bookmark this artist :
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour votre
profil sur www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this song :
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Create a New Station :
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que vous
connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous aimez.
Saisissez le nom d’une chanson, d’un artiste ou d’un
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique pour
vous en fonction des qualités musicales de la chanson,
de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a Pandora
1
Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora », puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez « I’m
new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation apparaîtra
sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez ce code. Utilisez
un ordinateur branché sur Internet et connectez le
navigateur à www.pandora.com/onkyo
■ Eléments du menu
I like this song :
Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d’autres musiques
similaires.
I don’t like this song :
Rejetez la chanson et Pandora éliminera cette chanson
de la station courante.
Why is this song playing? :
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio
personnelles.
Don’t play the song for a month :
Si vous en avez assez d’une chanson, vous pouvez
mettre la chanson « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira
plus pendant un mois.
Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes
en une étape !
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et vos
stations webradio Pandora personnalisées. Lorsque
vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer vos stations en
saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes préférés. Après
la création de votre compte et de vos stations, vous
pouvez retourner à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez
sur entrée pour écouter votre webradio Pandora
personnalisée.
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous pouvez
ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre récepteur Onkyo
en sélectionnant « I have a Pandora Account » et y
accéder en entrant votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de
passe.
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage
commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou
des marques déposées de la société Pandora Media, Inc.
Utilisées avec autorisation.
Create station from this artist :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet artiste.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».
Fr-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la
lecture.
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement)
2
3
Search :
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste, par
album ou par piste.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Music Guide :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des genres,des
meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs albums, des
meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et des sélections du
personnel.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,
RANDOM, REPEAT
Remarque
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web.
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne fonctionnent
pas.
Rhapsody Channels :
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.
Playlists :
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles.
My Library :
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le
catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My Library.
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
■ Eléments du menu
Add track to My Library :
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Add album to My Library :
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Add playlist to My Library :
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Add channel to My Channels :
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de
lecture.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste de
lecture à la liste My Favorites.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».
Conseil
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des canaux
Rhapsody marqués de My Library.
Fr-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)
1
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe
dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration
Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom
d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe, appelez Sirius XM
au (888) 539-7474 pour obtenir une assistance.
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus
séparément et sont subordonnés par les conditions Sirius
(voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous de lire cet accord
avant d’acquérir votre abonnement. Sirius, XM et tous les
logos et marques afférents sont des marques déposées de
Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de ses filiales. Tous droits
réservés.
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de
SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account Info » affiche
le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai. Une fois la
période d’essai expirée, si vous souhaitez continuer à
écouter le service, vous devez vous abonner. Pour vous
inscrire, accédez à l’adresse
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un nom
est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être saisis dans
l’ampli-tuner AV.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous à
l’aide de la télécommande :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran « SiriusXM
Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie que vous
pouvez sélectionner.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
2
3
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie
sélectionnée s’affiche.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de votre
choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche et
vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.
Fr-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Profile :
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently Listened
Tracks », « Library » et « Neighbours ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous
aimez…
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous pouvez
vous y connecter pour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account ». Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot
de passe dans l’écran clavier suivant.
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent. Si
vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une trace de
toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jouées. Quand vous
vous rendez sur le site Web de Last.fm, vous pouvez voir
les graphiques personnels de la musique que vous avez
appréciée, les partagez avec vos amis et également voir ce
qu’ils aiment.
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de
passe.
appuyez sur ENTER ou
1
pour démarrer la lecture.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
■ Eléments du menu
I Love this track :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm
Internet Radio » apparait.
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un choix
infini de stations de radio personnalisées et sans pub,
Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir de la musique.
Créez aujourd’hui votre compte Last.fm gratuit sur
www.last.fm/join
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture augmente.
Ban this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture diminue.
Add to My Favorites :
Conseil
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur de la
radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo
sans ordinateur !
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.
Recommended Radio :
■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées futées qui
changent en même temps que vos goûts.
Artist Radio :
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous jouerons
une station entière de musique inspirée par votre choix.
My Library :
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à partir
de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que
vous avez joint Last.fm.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
Search Station :
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste, par tag
ou par nom d’utilisateur.
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles dans
certaines zones.
Top Artists Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux évalués.
Top Tags Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux évalués.
Personal Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your
Neighbourhood » et « Your Recommendations »).
Tag Radio :
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et nous
vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même ce que
cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts.
Les derniers prix et les informations complètes sont
disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe
Fr-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en un à
partir du site Web de Slacker (www.slacker.com) à
l’aide de votre ordinateur.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6
1
■ Eléments du menu
Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
d’augmenter la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de
nouveau.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des
touches sur l’appareil principal.
Ban Song :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
de diminuer la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de
nouveau.
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/rpour
sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de confirmation des informations du compte
s’affiche.
2
3
Ban Artist :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
de diminuer la probabilité que les morceaux de cet
artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Mark Favorite :
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à vos
favoris.
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, sélectionnez
« Access without Sign In », puis appuyez sur
ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du
service.
Unmark Favorite :
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de
vos favoris.
Add song to Library :
bibliothèque.
Delete song from Library :
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de
votre bibliothèque.
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du menu,
4
5
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la liste
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour sélectionner
« Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis appuyez sur
ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la
lecture depuis cette station.
L’écran de lecture apparaît.
Fr-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
®
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de múltiples cuentas
Pandora Internet Radio –Primeros pasos
(solo EE.UU.) ............................................2
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de usuario,
lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente
entre varios usuarios. Después de registrar las cuentas de
usuario, el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla “Users”.
Procedimientos comunes en el menú
Internet Radio
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
Nota
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a otra.
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar
una existente.
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)........................................... 4
Pulse NET.
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea, verifique
que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente conectado al
receptor de AV.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6
Consejo
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio
seleccionado.
2
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples
cuentas de usuario.
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.
Es-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la lista de
emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una emisora de
su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la información sobre sus
aprobaciones / desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere
volver a crear la emisora con la misma canción o
artista.
Create station from this song:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canción.
Rename this station:
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil en
www.pandora.com.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted conoce y
le ayudará a descubrir música que le encantará.
Create a New Station:
Introduzca el nombre de una canción, artista o género;
Pandora creará una emisora de radio exclusiva para
usted basada en las cualidades musicales de esa
canción, de ese artista o de ese género.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego pulse
ENTER.
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la pantalla
del televisor. Tome nota de este código. Vaya a un
ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a
www.pandora.com/onkyo
■ Elementos del menú
I like this song:
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) una canción, Pandora
reproducirá más música parecida.
I don’t like this song:
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) la canción, Pandora
eliminará dicha canción de la emisora actual.
Why is this song playing?:
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
personalizadas.
Don’t play the song for a month:
Si se cansa de una canción, puede “silenciarla” de
Create station from this artist:
Bookmark this song:
Pandora marcará la canción actual y le permitirá
comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo
paso.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus
emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de
Pandora. Puede crear sus propias emisoras
introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos
cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente. Una vez
creada su cuenta y sus emisoras, puede regresar al
receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a
escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de
Pandora.
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la imagen
corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas
comerciales registradas de Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con
permiso.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have a
Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Es-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego pulse
ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)
2
3
Search:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o canción.
Music Guide:
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a
distancia.
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas
principales, álbumes principales o canciones
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.
Rhapsody Channels:
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los
principales redactores de Rhapsody.
Playlists:
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione “Sign in
to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el correo
electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web.
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Nota
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
funcionan.
■ Elementos del menú
Add track to My Library:
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add album to My Library:
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add playlist to My Library:
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add channel to My Channels:
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Reproduzca sus listas personales.
My Library:
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en el
catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm
your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de reproducción a
la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las emisoras de
Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.
Es-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego
pulse ENTER.
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)
1
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web. Si
no sabe su nombre de usuario o la contraseña, llame a
Sirius XM al número (888) 539-7474 para solicitar
asistencia.
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por
separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius (consulte
www.sirius.com). Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de
comprar la suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y
logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius
XM Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
reservados.
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de
SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account Info”
muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una vez que
termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir escuchando
este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para suscribirse vaya a
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su ordenador.
Consejo
contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor de AV.
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el receptor de
AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para usar el mando a
distancia, siga este procedimiento:
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm
your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la categoría
disponible para la selección.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y luego
pulse ENTER.
2
3
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la
categoría seleccionada.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora deseada y
luego pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la emisora
seleccionada y ahora usted podrá escuchar SiriusXM
Internet Radio.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a
distancia.
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Elementos del menú
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Es-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Profile:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente. Si
tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un seguimiento
de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar. Cuando
visite el sitio web de Last.fm, podrá ver listas personales de
la música que ha disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y
también ver lo que les gusta a ellos.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede acceder a ella
para seleccionar “Sign in to your account”.
Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contraseña en la
siguiente pantalla de teclado.
Se desconecta de su cuenta.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita variedad
de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin publicidad,
Last.fm es una forma excelente de descubrir música. Cree
hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm en
www.last.fm/join
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm
your entries”.
■ Elementos del menú
I Love this track:
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“Last.fm Internet Radio”.
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que
se reproduce.
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm Radio
sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de
un ordenador.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Ban this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la
que se reproduce.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Recommended Radio:
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada
momento.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego pulse
ENTER.
2
Search Station:
Artist Radio:
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o nombre
de usuario.
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una emisora de
radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elección.
My Library:
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música que ha
escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
■ Uso del control de scrobbling
Top Artists Station:
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor
clasificados.
Top Tags Station:
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor
clasificadas.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse
ENTER.
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros
pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén
disponibles en algunas zonas.
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y podrá
escucharlo durante horas.
Personal Station:
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” y “Your
Recommendations”).
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá por sí
mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del mundo al
alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los precios
actualizados y toda la información que desee en
www.last.fm/subscribe
Es-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web de
Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su ordenador.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6
1
■ Elementos del menú
Rate Song as Favorite:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
más probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.
Ban Song:
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione “Sign
in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede introducir
información desde el mando a distancia o desde el
teclado de la unidad principal.
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
menos probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.
Ban Artist:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
menos probable que las canciones de este artista se
vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a los favoritos.
Si no hay errores en la información que ha
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.
2
3
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la
información de la cuenta.
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access without
Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar una versión
restringida del servicio.
Unmark Favorite:
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Add song to Library:
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego pulse
Delete song from Library:
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de la biblioteca.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis favoritos.
4
5
ENTER.
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out” en
esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la reproducción de
la emisora.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.
Es-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which
means you can freely switch between several logins.
After registering user accounts, login is performed from
the “Users” screen.
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Note
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or delete
an existing one.
Press NET.
1
A list of the network services appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
Tip
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and
then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a
free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs
you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,
you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,
share them with friends and see what they like, too.
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign
in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in the
next keyboard screen.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm
account today at www.last.fm/join
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet
Radio” screen appears.
UK and Germany only:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a
computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt
as your tastes change.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select menu and then press ENTER.
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
2
Artist Radio:
Search Station:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music
inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve
heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
■ Using scrobbling control
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.
Top Artists Station:
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
You can play tracks from personalized station (“Your
Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and “Your
Recommendations”).
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
Internetradio verwenden
Verwendung mehrerer Konten
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten, was
bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren Logins
umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den
Internetradio-Menüs
Anmerkung
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm des
Nutzers angezeigt wird.
1
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.
Das folgende Menü erscheint:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.
Drücken Sie NET.
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die
NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt, überprüfen
Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-Receiver
eingesteckt ist.
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und
drücken Sie ENTER.
2
Tipp
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services erscheint.
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.
De-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
Profile:
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your account“
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign in to
your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden
Tastaturanzeige ein.
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.
Account Info:
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
Sign Out:
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre
Lieblingsmusik merkt...
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie ein
kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden darin alle
kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie die Last.fm-
Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre persönlichen Charts der von
Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden
und sehen Sie auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.
■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender auszuwählen
und dann drücken Sie ENTER oder 1 , um die
Wiedergabe zu starten.
3
1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/rund den ENTER, um
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer schier
endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten, werbefreien
Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige Gelegenheit, um
Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-
Konto noch heute unter www.last.fm/join
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm
your entries“ erscheint.
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.
„Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach erscheint
die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.
■ Menüsymbole
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch ohne
Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-Radiosender auf
Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!
I Love this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird
erhöht.
Tipp
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer Konten“
nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom „Users“-
Bildschirm aus erfolgen.
Recommended Radio:
Ban this track:
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste Empfehlungen,
die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack verändern.
Artist Radio:
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen
für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl
inspirierter Musik.
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird
verringert.
Add to My Favorites:
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste
hinzu.
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü auszuwählen
und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Search Station:
2
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten, Tags
oder Benutzernamen suchen.
My Library:
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an einer
Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei
Last.fm gehört haben.
Top Artists Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten
wiedergeben.
Top Tags Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags
wiedergeben.
■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und dann
Tag Radio:
drücken Sie ENTER.
und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-Dienste
können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung eingestellt
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr
Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist,
jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu können.
Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind
unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich
werden.
Personal Station:
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste eventuell
nicht verfügbar.
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich angepassten
Sender wiedergeben („Your Library“, „Your
Y1112-1
SN 29401229
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 2 2 9 *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”
button and “Display” button.
Remote Control Codes
/
1
2
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the component’s functionality.
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codes de télécommande
Códigos de control remoto
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
environ 3 secondes).
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
segundos).
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».
Remarques :
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.
Notas:
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi
zone.
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.
Notas:
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
hasta que coincida con su componente.
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.
Remarques :
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
mando a distancia.
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande
existants.
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codici del telecomando
Fernbedienungscodes
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.
Hinweise:
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.
Note:
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi
zona.
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
werden.
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre.
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
Hinweise:
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.
Note:
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale
apparecchio.
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist
nicht garantiert.
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Afstandsbedieningscodes
Fjärrstyrningskoder
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening gaat branden.
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.
Anmärkningar:
Opmerkingen:
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi
zone-toets.
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de
afstandsbedieningscode.
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
2
Anmärkningar:
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.
Opmerkingen:
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van
uw AV-receiver.
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de
stämmer överens med din utrustning.
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
•
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
遙控代碼
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住
遥控代码
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住[DISPLAY
（显示）]（大约 3 秒钟）。
1
1
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯亮起。
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode（遥控模
式）”按钮和“Display（显示）”按钮。
注意：
注意：
• [RECEIVER（接收机）]和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。
• 只能为[TV（电视）]输入电视遥控编码。
• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如，如果
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。
•
除[RECEIVER（接收机）]、[TV（电视）]和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE（遥
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮。例如，如果
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择[TV/CD（电视/CD）]。
在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈
會慢慢地閃爍一次。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯闪烁两次。
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯会
缓慢闪烁一次。
2
2
注意：
注意：
• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便
可激活相应设备的相关预设。
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應
為止。
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Cable/PVR Combination
Dedicated Onkyo Receiver
Cable Set Top Box
mio TV
Cable Set Top Box
Toshiba
Default
Zone 2
Zone 3
62503
62506
62507
02802
01509
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
Shaw
01877
Motorola
01376, 00858, 01562,
01982, 01998, 02378
UPC
01582
01877, 01982
01376
Verizon
02378
Moxi
02187
Videotron
Virgin Media
Visiopass
VTR
01877
Suddenlink
Thomson
Time Warner
UPC
01376, 01877
01582
NEC
01496
Cable Set Top Box
ADB
01068, 01060
00817
Neuf TV
Noos
03107
02254, 02769
02769
01376, 01877, 02187
01582
00817
Aon
01376
NTL
01068, 01060
02767
Arris
02187
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
01877
Videotron
VTR
01877
Numericable
Ono
AT&T
00858
00660, 01666, 02015,
02142, 02447, 02774
01376
01068, 01562
01060
Bright House
BT Vision
Cable & Wireless
Cable One
Cablecom
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
02294
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
01877
Optus
Orange
Pace
02142
Cable/PVR Combination
00817
01068
Arris
02187
01376, 01877, 01068,
01060, 01982
IPTV
01376, 01877
01582
Bright House
Cable One
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
01877, 01982
ADB
02254, 02769
02769
Panasonic
Philips
01488, 01982
Aon
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
00817, 01582, 02294,
02767
AT&T
BT Vision
Canal+
Cisco
00858
02294
Cisco
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378
Pioneer
RCN
01877, 01500
01376
Cisco
02657
Com Hem
Comcast
00817, 00660, 01666,
02015, 02447
Comcast
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Rogers
Sagem
Samsung
01877
Kreatel
mio TV
Motorola
00817
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
Cox
01376, 01877
02187
02802
01877, 01060, 01666,
02015, 02774
Digeo
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Cox
01376, 01877
01877
Freebox
Humax
Insight
01482
Scientific Atlanta
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345
Daeryung
Digeo
02142, 03051, 03053
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
02187
02657
SFR
03107
DX Antenna
France Telecom
Freebox
Fujitsu
01500
J:COM
Knology
Mediacom
Motorola
Moxi
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
Shaw
01376
00817
SingTel
Sony
01998, 02802
01460
01482
01376, 01877
01376
SingTel
01998, 02802
01385
01497
TeliaSonera
Telus
Stofa
02015
Humax
00660, 02142, 02447,
03051, 03053
02187
02345
Suddenlink
Sumitomo
Telewest
TeliaSonera
Telus
01376, 01877
01500
Numericable
Pace
02767
Thomson
Verizon
02769
Insight
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
01877
02378
01068
J:COM
Knology
Kreatel
Macab
Panasonic
Philips
01982
01385
01582, 02767
01877
IPTV/PVR Combination
02345
01385
Pioneer
Rogers
ADB
Aon
02769
02769
Thomson
Time Warner
01582, 01982, 02769
01376, 01877, 02187
00817
01877
Mediacom
01376, 01877
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
IPTV/PVR Combination
CD
CD
MD
AT&T
00858
Goldmund
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Integra
JVC
70157
Restek
70157
Yamaha
70490
BT Vision
Cisco
02294
70157
Revox
70157
Cassette Deck
Aiwa
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
70157
Rotel
70157
40029
40076
40029
40029
40076
40029
40029
40070
40244
40070
40029
40029
40029
42157
40027
40029
40027
40029
40029
40027
40029
40029
40243
40029
40244
40027, 40029
40097
Kreatel
70032
SAE
70157
Arcam
Motorola
Neuf TV
Philips
00858, 02378
03107
71817, 70101
70072
Sansui
70157
Audiolab
Carver
SAST
70157
02294
Kenwood
Krell
70626, 70157, 70036
70157
Siemens
Silsonic
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
70157
Denon
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858
70036
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Inkel
03107
Linn
70157
70157
Verizon
02378
Loewe
70157
70157
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
MCS
70157
70490, 70000
70157
CD
JVC
70626, 70029, 70157
70157
Sylvania
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Advantage
AH!
70032
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
Kenwood
Magnavox
Marantz
Myryad
Onkyo
70157
70029
70032
Aiwa
Memorex
Meridian
Micromega
Miro
70032
Technics
Thorens
Thule Audio
Traxdata
Universum
Victor
70029, 70303
70157
Arcam
70157
Atoll Electronique
Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Audioton
AVI
70157
70157
Optimus
Philips
70000
70626
Mission
Myryad
NAD
70157
70157
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Radiola
RCA
70157
70072
70000, 70721
70157
Wards
70000, 70032, 70157
70490, 70032, 70036
70157
Naim
Yamaha
Zonda
Balanced Audio
Technology
NSM
70157
Revox
Onkyo
71817
Cairn
70157
CD-R
Denon
JVC
Sansui
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Primare
Proton
70000, 70032
70029, 70303
70626, 70157
70032, 70101
70157
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
70626, 70766
70072
Sony
Cambridge
Cambridge Audio
Carver
70157
Thorens
Victor
70157
Kenwood
Marantz
Onkyo
Philips
Sony
70626
70157
70626
Wards
CCE
70157
71323
Yamaha
70157
Cyrus
70157
70626
70157
Denon
70626, 70766
70000
Accessory
Apple
70000
QED
70157
DKK
81115
Quad
70157
DMX Electronics
Dynaco
70157
MD
Jamo
82228
Quasar
Radiola
RCA
70029
70157
Onkyo
Sony
70868
Logitech
Onkyo
82182
70157
Genexxa
70000, 70032
70490, 70000
82990, 81993, 82351
70032
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Accessory
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
CGV
Satellite Set Top Box
Polk Audio
82228
Amstrad
00847, 01175, 01662,
01693
01413, 01567
01334, 01626
01176
Durabrand
Echostar
01284
Chess
00775, 00853, 01323,
01409, 02527
Ansonic
Arnion
02418
Video - Accessory
ADB
CityCom
Clatronic
Clayton
Com Hem
Comag
01300
Eco-Star
Edision
01413
02254, 02769
02769
01413
ASCI
01334
01631
Aon
01626
AssCom
Astro
00853
Elap
01413, 01567
02418
Apple
02615
01176, 01915
01413
00173, 01100
02418
Elbe
AT&T
00858
Atlanta
Atsat
Energy Sistem
Engel
01631, 02418
01251
BT Vision
Canal+
02294
Comsat
01413
01300
02657
Coship
01457
AtSky
01334
EuroLine
Europhon
Europsat
Expressvu
Fagor
01251
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Crown
01284
Audiola
Aurora
02418
01334
Kreatel
CS
01631
00879, 00642, 01433
00879, 00642, 01259
01631
01413, 01611
00775
mio TV
Motorola
02802
Cyfra+
01409
Austar
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Cyfrowy Polsat
D-box
00853, 02527
00723, 01114
01626
Avanit
01611
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
Awa
02418
Ferguson
Finlux
01291
Dantax
02657
Axil
01413, 01457, 02418
01626
01626
Denver
02418
Philips
02294
Axitronic
Balmet
Bell ExpressVu
Belson
Fly Com
FMD
01457
Dgtec
01242, 01631, 02418
02418
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
01457
01413, 01457
00879, 01176, 01356
02408
Dick Smith
Electronics
00775
Foxtel
SingTel
TeliaSonera
Telus
01998, 02802
01385
02418
Digi Raum Electronics 01176
Freesat
Big Sat
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Boshmann
Boston
01457
Digiality
Digifusion
Digihome
DigiLogic
DigiQuest
Digisky
01334
Fuba
00173, 01251
00853, 00879
01176
02345
01284
01645
Galaxis
Thomson
Verizon
02769
00173
01284
General Satellite
Globo
02378
01413, 01631
01251
01284
01251, 01334, 01626
00775
01300, 01457, 01631
01457
GOI
Receiver
Boxer
01458
Gold Box
Gold Vision
GoldMaster
Goodmans
Gradiente
Grandin
Grocos
00853
Onkyo
52503
British Sky
Broadcasting
00847, 01175, 01662
DigitalBox
Digiwave
DirecTV
Dish Network
Dishpro
01100, 01631
01631
01631
01334
Satellite Set Top Box
BskyB
Bush
00847, 01175, 01662
01377, 00099
00775
01284, 01291
00099, 00887
01626
@sat
01300
01284, 01291, 01626,
01645
@Sky
01334
00775
Acoustic Solutions
ADB
01284
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
Canal+
00853, 01334
00853, 02657
00853, 02657
00853, 02657
01457
DishTV
01300
01409, 01457
00642, 00887, 01259
01626
DRE
01176
Grundig
00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291
Akura
Dream Multimedia
DSE
01237
Alba
01284
CanalSat
Haier
Hallo
02418
01626
02280, 02418
00879, 00642, 01433
Allvision
01334
Centrex
DSTV
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Hama
01567
Leiko
01626
Pace
00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356,
01423, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02059, 02060,
02211, 02657
Sat Industrie
SAT+
01611
Hanseatic
Hirschmann
Hitachi
Hornet
01100
00173
01284
01300
00775
Lemon
01334
01409
Lenoxx
Linsar
01611
Satplus
01100
01284
SatyCon
01631
Listo
01626
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Schwaiger
Sedea Electronique
SEG
02418
Pacific
01284
HTS
Lodos
01284
01206, 01251
01334, 01457, 01631
01206, 01626
01251, 01284, 01626
01611
Palcom
Panasat
Panasonic
01409, 01611
00879, 01433
Humax
01377, 01176, 01427,
01675, 01808, 01882,
01915, 02144, 02408,
02616
Logik
01284
Macab
00853
00847, 01304, 01404,
03099
Manhattan
Maspro
Matsui
01300
Panda
Pass
00173
00173
Servimat
ServiSat
ID Digital
ID Sat
01176
01567
00173, 01284, 01626
01334
01251
01334
peeKTon
Philips
01457, 02418
Maximum
Mediabox
Mediacom
MediaSat
Medion
MegaSat
Metronic
Shark
01631
ILLUSION sat
Imperial
Indovision
iNETBOX
Inno Hit
Innova
01631
00099, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00887, 00133,
02211
00853
Sherwood
Siemens
01409
01195, 01334
00887
01206
00173, 01334, 01626,
02418
00853
01237
Phoenix
Pino
02418
Sigmatek
SKY
02418
01334, 01626
01631
01626
01334
00099, 00847, 00887,
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
00099
Pioneer
PMB
00853, 01308
01611
01334, 01413, 01631,
02418
inVion
02418
iotronic
01413
SKY Brazil
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
00887
Premiere
Pro Basic
Proline
QNS
00723
Metz
00173
ISkyB
00887
02754
00853
Moserbaer
Movistar
Multichoice
01251
ITT
02418
00853, 01693, 01850
02211
01284
02527, 02761
ITT Nokia
Jadeworld
Jaeger
00723
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky XL
01404
00879, 00642, 01433,
02059, 02060
00642
02299, 02616, 03099
01251
RCA
01291
01334
Regal
01251
MySky
NEOTION
Netsat
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
JVC
00775
Sky+
01175, 01662
Roadstar
Rollmaster
Rownsonic
SAB
00853
KabelBW
Kaon
01195, 01882, 01915
01300
Skymaster
01334, 01409, 01567,
01611
01413
00099, 00887
00723
01567
Nikko
Skymax
Skyplus
01413
Kathrein
Kenwood
Koenig
00173, 01561, 01567
00853
01251, 01300, 01631
01114
Nokia
00853, 00723, 01223
01611
01175, 01334
01100
Sagem
Saivod
Samsung
Nordmende
NPG
SkySat
01631
02418
01631
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
01334
Kreiling
Kreiselmeyer
L&S Electronic
LaSAT
01626
01377, 00853, 01175,
01206, 01458, 01662,
02986
Onn
01284
01409
00173
Optex
01413, 01611, 01626
00879, 01356
01334
01404, 01413, 01631
01457
01334
Optus
Sansui
01251
01626
01300
SmartVision
Sony
00173
Orbis
Sanyo
00847, 00853, 01558,
02299
Lava
01631
Orbitech
01100, 01195
Sat Control
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
SAT/PVR Combination
SAT/PVR Combination
Star
00887
UBC
00642
BskyB
01175, 01662
Schneider
01206
01206
Stream System
Strong
01300
UEC
00879, 01356
01251, 01626, 02418
01882
Bush
01645
Sedea Electronique
SKY
00853, 00879, 01284,
01300, 01409, 01626,
02418
United
Canal Satellite
Canal+
02657
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
Unitymedia
Universum
Variosat
VEA
02657
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky+
02754
00173, 01251
00173
CanalSat
02657
Sunny
01300
01693, 01850
02211
Cyfrowy Polsat
Digifusion
DigiQuest
DirecTV
02527
Sunstar
00642
02418
01645
Supernova
Supratech
Systec
00887
02299, 03099
01662
Vestel
01251, 01284
01195
01300
01413
Viasat
01377, 00099, 20739
00775
01334
Skyplus
01175, 01334
01631
Vision
01626
Dish Network
Dishpro
Sytech
02418
Smart
Visiosat
Vitecom
Vivax
01413, 01457
01413
00775
TBoston
Teac
01251, 02418
01251
Sony
02299
Dream Multimedia
Echostar
01237
Stream System
Strong
01300
02418
00775, 02527
01631
Technical
Technika
TechniSat
Technosat
Techwood
TELE System
Telefonica
Telestar
01626
01300
Volcasat
Wavelength
Wharfedale
Wisi
02418
Edision
01284
Sunny
01300
01413
Expressvu
Foxtel
00775
01100, 01195
01206
TechniSat
Technosat
Telefonica
Telestar
01195
01284
01356
01206
00173
Humax
01176, 01427, 01675,
01808
01251, 01284, 01626
01251, 01409, 01611
02527, 02761
02527
Worldsat
Woxter
Xsat
01251
ID Sat
01334
01195
02418
iNETBOX
Kaon
01237
Thomson
Topfield
01175, 01662
01206
00847, 01323
01300
01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626
01300
Xtreme
Yakumo
Yes
Kathrein
Maximum
Mediacom
MegaSat
Movistar
Multichoice
MySky
01561
Viasat
01195
01413
Televes
Televisa
Tevion
01300, 01334
00887
01334
Xtreme
01300
00887
01206
Zehnder
01251, 01334, 01413,
01631
01409
Television
A.R. Systems
Accent
01631
Thomson
00847, 00853, 01175,
01046, 01291, 01662
10556, 10037
10037
Zinwell
02280, 02761
01300
02527
02059, 02060
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
Tonna
Topfield
Toshiba
Trevi
01611
01206
01284
01251
Satellite Set Top Box
Acer
11339
@sat
Acoustic Solutions
Action
11037, 11667
10650
NEOTION
Pace
01175, 01356, 01423,
01662, 01693, 01850,
02059, 02060, 02211,
02657
SAT/PVR Combination
Addison
AEG
10653
Triax
00853, 01251, 01291,
01413, 01611, 01626,
01631
@sat
01300
11037, 11324
12719
Amstrad
Atsat
01175, 01662, 01693
01300
Agfaphoto
Aiko
Panasonic
Philips
01304, 03099
00099
10037
Tricolor TV
True Visions
Twinner
01176
02408
01611
Bell ExpressVu
00775
Aim
10037, 10499
Samsung
Sat Control
01175, 01206, 01662
01300
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175, 01662
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Casio
Television
Akai
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10208,
11675
Basic Line
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
10037
Dick Smith
Electronics
10698
Cathay
10037
Baur
10037, 10195, 10512
10178
Digatron
Digihome
Digiline
Digitek
Digitor
Dixi
10037
CCE
10037
Akiba
Akito
Akura
10037
10037
Beaumark
Beijing
Beko
11667
Centrum
Centurion
Changhong
Chimei
11037
10208
10037, 10668
11709
10037
10171, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11363,
11585, 11667, 11709
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
10508
10037, 10698
10037
11666
Belson
10698
Clarivox
Classic
10037
Alba
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11585
Belstar
11037
DL
11363
10499
Beon
10037
DMTech
Domeos
Drean
12001
Alien
11037
Clatronic
Clayton
Condor
Conrowa
Contec
10037, 10714, 11324
11037
Berthen
Bestar
10556, 10668
10037
10668
Allstar
10037
10037
Amstrad
Anam
10171, 10037, 11037
10037
10037
Bexa
12493
DSE
10698
10698
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
11037
Dual
10037, 11037, 11585,
11667
Anam National
Andersson
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
10037, 10650
11585
10037
10195
Cosmel
CPTEC
Crown
10037
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10715, 10499, 11324,
11363, 11652, 11709
Durabrand
10178, 10171, 10714,
11037, 11652
10037
10625, 11363
10037, 10668
10178, 10625, 11365
10037, 10714
10037
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715, 10208,
11652
Dux
10037
DX Antenna
Dynatron
Dynex
11817, 13817
10037
Ardem
Boca
11652
Cyberpix
D-Vision
Daewoo
11667
Arena
Boman
Bork
11324
12049
10556, 10037
Aristona
ART
10556, 10037
11037
11363
e-motion
E:max
11709
10178, 10556, 10037,
10634, 10499, 12098
BPL
10037, 10208
10625, 10714, 10560
11709
11324
Art Mito
Asberg
11585
Brandt
Brimax
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Bush
Dansai
Dantax
10037, 10208
Easy Living
ECE
11666, 11709
10037
10037
10714, 11037, 10715,
11652
Astra
10037
10037, 10668
10037
Elbe
10556, 10037
11755
ATD
10698
Datsura
Dawa
10208
Electrograph
Element
Elfunk
Atlantic
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Audioworld
Aventura
Axxon
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10208, 11585, 11652,
11667, 12719
10037
11886
10037, 10714, 10715
11564
Daytron
De Graaf
DEC
10037
11037
10208
ELG
10037
10698
11709
Byd:sign
Camper
Carad
12140, 12209
10037
Elin
10037
10171
Decca
10037
Elite
10037
10714
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
10037, 11709
10037
10668, 11037
10037
Emerson
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11394,
11864, 11886
Baird
10208
Carena
Bang & Olufsen
Barco
10565
10037
Carrefour
Cascade
10037
10556
Envision
Epson
11365, 11506
11379
10698
10037
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Erres
Television
Genesis
Genexxa
GFM
Television
Television
ITV
10037
10037
Hisense
10556, 10508, 10208,
11363, 12098
10037
ESA
10171
10037
JGC
11709
Hitachi
10150, 10178, 10037,
10634, 11037, 10508,
10499, 10578, 11576,
11585, 11643, 11667,
11691, 12433
ESC
10037
10171, 11864, 11886
11585
Jinfeng
Jinxing
JMB
10208
Euroman
Europa
10037
Godrej
10556, 10037, 10698
10556, 10634, 10499
10556
10037
Goldfunk
GoldStar
10668
Europhon
Evesham
Excello
Exquisit
Ferguson
10037
10178, 10037, 10714,
10715
Jubilee
JVC
Hitachi Fujian
Hitec
10150
10698
10714
10037
11666
11295
11248, 11667
11037
10650, 10653, 10508,
11428, 11601, 12271
Goodmans
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10560, 10668,
10634, 11037, 10499,
11585, 11667
Kaisui
Karcher
Kathrein
Kendo
Kennex
Kioto
10037
Hoeher
10037
10714, 11324
10556
Hornyphon
Hugoson
Humax
10037, 10625, 10560,
10195, 11037, 11585
Gorenje
Gradiente
Graetz
11585
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
10171, 10037, 10512
10208
10037, 11037, 11585
11037
10037
Hypson
10668, 11037, 10715
10714
10556, 10037, 10714,
10715, 11248, 11667
10556
Granada
Grandin
10037, 10560, 10208
Hyundai
Iberia
11037, 10698
10037
Kiton
10037, 10668
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715,
11652
Firstline
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10208,
11363
KLL
ICE
10037
Kneissel
Koenig
Kolin
10556, 10037, 10499
10037
Grundig
10556, 10037, 10195,
11223, 11667, 12625
iLo
11394
Fisher
10208
Imperial
Indiana
Ingelen
Inno Hit
Innova
Insignia
10037
10150, 10037, 11610,
11755
Flint
10037
GVA
11363, 12098
12001
10037
Formenti
Fraba
10037
H & B
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Kosmos
Kunlun
L&S Electronic
Lavic
10037
10714
10037
Haier
10037, 10698, 10508
10178
10037, 10714
10037
11037, 11585
10037
Friac
10037, 10499
11709
Hallmark
Hankook
Hanseatic
Fujicom
Fujitsu
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
10178
10037
10171, 11423, 11564,
12049
10809
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10634, 10499,
12001
10208
10809, 11248, 11666
Integra
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
Intervision
Irradio
IRT
11807, 13100, 13500
10037
10714
10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666,
11817, 13817
11363
Hantarex
Hantor
Harwood
Hauppauge
HB
10037
10037, 10512
10556
Lavis
11037
10037
Lecson
Lenco
10037
G-Hanz
Gaba
11363
11037
10037
10037
11755
10037
10037
10037, 11037
10037
10037
10037
Leyco
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GE
11324
10698
LG
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10698,
11423, 11768, 11840,
12182, 12358, 12424,
12834
HCM
10037
Isukai
10037
Highline
Hinari
10037
ITS
10037
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560
10037, 10208
10714
ITT
10208
Hisawa
GEC
10037
ITT Nokia
10208
Liesenkoetter
10037
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Naiko
Television
Onix
Lifetec
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 12001
Medion
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10512, 11248, 11585,
11667, 12001, 12719
10037
10698
Nakimura
National
NEC
10037
Onkyo
Onn
11807, 13100, 13500
11667, 11709
11709
Linsar
11585
10508, 10208
Local India TV
Local Malaysia TV
Lodos
10208
10178, 10653, 10508,
10499
Onyx
Megatron
MEI
10178
10698
Opera
Optimus
Orbit
10037, 10714
10650
11037
11037
Neckermann
NEI
10556, 10037
10037, 11037
11324
Memorex
Mercury
Mermaid
Metronic
Metz
10150, 10178, 11037
10037
Loewe
10037, 10512, 11884
11037, 10698
10668
10037
Logik
NEO
Orion
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 12001
10037
Logix
Netsat
10037
10625
Luma
11037
NetTV
11755
Orline
10037
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 11533
Lumatron
Lumenio
Lux May
Luxor
10037, 10668
10037
Neufunk
New Tech
Newave
Nikkai
10556, 10037, 10714
10556, 10037
10178
Ormond
Osaki
10668, 11037
10556, 10037
10037
MGA
10150, 10178
10037
Osio
Micromaxx
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11324, 12001
11037, 10208
10178
10037
Osume
Otto Versand
10037
LXI
Nikkei
10714
10556, 10037, 10195,
10512
Microspot
Mikomi
11614
M Electronic
10037, 10714, 10634,
10195, 10512, 11652
Nikko
10178
11037, 11585
10037
Pacific
10556, 10714, 11037,
11324
Nokia
10208
Minato
Madison
10037
Norcent
Nordmende
11365
Minerva
10195, 11248
11667
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
10556, 10037, 10714
10037, 10698
10037
Magnavox
10171, 11454, 11365,
11506, 11755, 11867,
12372
10037, 10714, 10560,
10195, 11585, 11667,
12001
Ministry Of Sound
Minoka
10037
Mirai
11666
Magnum
Manesth
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
10037, 10714, 10715
10037
Normerel
Nortek
Novatronic
Novita
Nu-Tec
O.K.Line
Oceanic
Odys
10037
Panasonic
11480, 10037, 10650,
10508, 10208, 11636,
12170
Mitsubishi
10150, 11250, 10178,
10556, 10037, 11037,
10512, 11171
10668
10037, 10668, 11037
11454, 10556, 10037
10037, 10714, 10715
10499
10037
Panavision
Panda
10037
11585
Mivar
10609
10698, 10508, 10208
11636
10698
Moree
10037
Pansonic
Penney
Perdio
Master's
Mastro
11037, 11324
10208
Morgan's
Moserbaer
MTC
10037
10178
10698
11585
10037
Masuda
Matsui
10037
12719
10512
Perfekt
Petters
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10195, 11037, 10208,
11666, 11667
Okano
OKI
10037
MTlogic
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Myrica
Myryad
NAD
10714
10037
11585, 11667
11610, 12124
10698
10208
Philco
10178, 10171, 10037,
11394
Olevia
Omni
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
Matsushita
Maxent
Maxess
Meck
10650
11755
Philips
Phocus
10178, 10171, 11454,
10556, 10037, 10512,
10605, 10690, 11394,
11506, 11867, 12372
Onei
11667
11666
12493
Onida
10653
10556
10698
Onimax
10714
10178, 10037
Mediator
10556, 10037
10714, 11652
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Phoenix
Television
Reflex
Television
Sei-Sinudyne
Serie Dorada
Shanghai
Television
SunBriteTV
Sungoo
10037
10037, 10668, 11037
11585
10037
10178
10208
11610
Phonola
10556, 10037
Relisys
Remotec
Reoc
11248
Pioneer
10037, 10698, 10512,
11457, 11636, 12171
10171, 10037
10714
Sunny
10037
Sharp
10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659
Sunstar
10037
Plantron
10037
Revox
10037
Sunstech
Sunwood
Supersonic
SuperTech
Supra
12001
Playsonic
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
Shintoshi
Shivaki
Siam
10037
RFT
10037
10037
10178, 10037
10037
Roadstar
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715
10208
Powerpoint
Prinston
10037, 10698
11037, 10715
10037
10556, 10037
10178
Rolson
Rowa
12001, 12098
10037, 10698
10625, 10714, 10560
10618
Siemens
Siera
10037, 10195
10556, 10037
10037
Profitronic
Proline
Svasa
10208
10037, 10625, 10634,
11037
Saba
Silva
Swisstec
Sylvania
11614, 11775
Sagem
Saivod
Salora
Sampo
Silva Schneider
Silver
10037
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886
Prosonic
10037, 10714, 10668,
11324, 11585, 11667,
11709, 12001
10037, 10668, 11037
10208, 12001
10715
SilverCrest
Sinudyne
SKY
11037
Symphonic
Synco
10171, 11394
10178, 11755
11610
10178, 10171, 10650,
11755
10037
Protech
Proton
10037, 10668, 11037
10178
10037, 11614, 11775
10037, 10698
11324
Syntax
Sysline
Tacico
Talent
Samsung
10178, 10556, 10037,
10618, 10650, 10208,
12051
Skyworth
Sliding
SLX
10037
ProVision
10556, 10037, 10714,
11324
10178
Pvision
Pye
12001
10668
10178
Sansui
Sanyo
10171, 10037, 10714,
11248, 12001
10556, 10037
10208
Solavox
Soniko
Soniq
10037
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL
10650
Qingdao
Quasar
Quelle
10037
10037, 11248, 11324
11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585,
11667, 11974
10650
12493
10698, 12403, 12429,
12434, 13183
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10512
Sonitron
Sonneclair
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
10208
SBR
10556, 10037
TCM
Teac
10714, 12001
10037
R-Line
10037
Schaub Lorenz
10714, 11324, 11363,
11667, 12001
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10698, 10512, 11248,
11363, 11709, 11755
10037
Radiola
10556, 10037
10037
10208
Schneider
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037
Radiomarelli
RadioShack
Radiotone
RCA
10037
10178, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
Sony
10810, 11505, 11167,
11651, 11825
Tec
10037
Schoentech
Scotch
Scott
11037
Tech Line
Technica
Technics
Technika
TechniSat
Technisson
Techno
10037, 10668
11037
10178
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560, 10618, 11781,
12247, 12403, 12429,
12434, 12746, 12932
Soundesign
Soundwave
Sowa
10178
10178
10037, 11037, 10715
10178
10556, 10650
11667
Sears
10178, 10171
10634
Seaway
Seelver
SEG
Squareview
Standard
Starlite
10171
Realistic
Recor
10178
10037
10037
10037
10556
11037
10037, 11037, 11709
10037
10714, 11652
11585
10037, 10668, 11037,
12719
Rectiligne
Redstar
Strato
10037
SEI
10037
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Toyoda
Television
VU
VCR
Technosonic
10556, 10625, 10499,
11324
11709
11365, 12098
11667
Humax
Panasonic
Philips
20739
TRANS-continents
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
Walker
Waltham
Wansa
20614, 20616
20739
Techvision
Techwood
Tecnimagen
Teco
11709
10037, 10668, 11037
12098
11037, 11667
10556
Transonic
10037, 10698, 10512,
11363
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
Sony
20614, 20616
20614, 20616
20636
Wards
10178
Triad
10556
10178, 10653
10208, 11709
10150
Watson
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037
Trio
11248
Tedelex
TiVo
20636, 20739
Triumph
TVTEXT 95
Uher
10556, 10037
10556
Teknika
Wega
10037
TELE System
Telecor
11585
Welltech
Weltstar
10714, 11652
11037
PVR
10037
10037
DirecTV
Go Video
Humax
Panasonic
Philips
20739
Ultravox
UMC
10037
Telefunken
10037, 10625, 10714,
10560, 10698, 11585,
11667
Westinghouse
Wharfedale
11755
20614
11614, 11775
10037
10556, 10037, 11324,
11667
20739
Unic Line
Uniden
United
20614, 20616
20739
Telefusion
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
10037
12122
White Westinghouse 10037
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 10715, 11652
Wilson
10556
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
Sony
20614, 20616
20614, 20616
20636
10037
Windsor
Windy Sam
Wintel
10668, 11037
10556
10037
Unitek
11709
10556, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
Universal
Universum
10037, 10714
10714
TiVo
20636, 20739
Teletech
Teleview
Tennessee
Tensai
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10618, 10512
World-of-Vision
Wyse
12001
11365
TV/VCR Combination
Univox
10037
10037
Xenius
10634
Amstrad
Ferguson
Fidelity
GoldStar
Grundig
LG
10171
V7 Videoseven
Vestel
11666, 11755
10037, 11037, 10715
Xiahua
10698
10625
10037, 10668, 11037,
11585, 11667
Tesla
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 11652
XLogic
10698
10171
Xrypton
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
10037
10037
Vexa
10037
Tevion
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11248,
11585, 11667
10650, 11576
10037
10556, 10037, 10195
10178
Victor
10650, 10653, 11428
10037, 10508
10037
Videocon
VideoSystem
Vidtech
10037
Mitsubishi
Philips
Radiola
Saba
10556
Thomson
Thorn
10037, 10625, 10560
10037, 10499, 10512
10499
Yoko
10037
10556, 10037
10556
10178
YU-MA-TU
Zenith
10037
Thorn-Ferguson
TMK
Viewsonic
11365, 11564, 11755,
12049
10178, 10037, 11365,
11423, 12358
10625
10178
Sanyo
11974
Tokai
10037, 10668, 11037
11037
Vision
Vistron
Vivax
10037
Zepto
Zonda
11585
10698
Schneider
Sharp
10556, 10037
10818
Tokaido
Topline
Toshiba
11363
10668, 11037
11709
Siemens
Sony
10037
10195, 11037, 10618,
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652,
12203
Vizio
11758, 12209
10037
VCR
11505
Vortec
Voxson
DirecTV
Go Video
20739
20614
Teac
10178, 10171
10178, 10037
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
TV/VCR Combination
DVD
DVD
DVD
Technics
Thomson
10556
Dantax
Denon
30539, 30713
Harman/Kardon
Henss
30582, 31229, 33228
30713
Maxim
MDS
30713
10625
30490, 30634, 31634,
32258, 32748
30713
Hitachi
30573, 30713, 31664
30713
Medion
Memorex
Metz
30630, 30741
32213
Dick Smith
Electronics
31152
DVD
Hoeher
3D LAB
Accurian
Acoustic Solutions
AEG
30539
30675
30713
HotMedia
Humax
31152
30571, 30713
30503, 30539
30539
Digihome
DigiLogic
Digix Media
Disney
30713
30646
Micromedia
Micromega
Microsoft
Minax
30713
Inno Hit
Insignia
30713
31394
30675
30741, 30675, 32428,
32596
30522, 32083
30713
30675
AFK
31152
DSE
30675, 31152
30713
Integra
30503, 30571, 30627,
31612, 31634, 32147
Aiwa
30533
Mitsubishi
Momitsu
NAD
30713
Dual
Akai
30675
30539, 30713
33052
33052
Durabrand
Dynex
30675, 30713
32596
Irradio
JVC
30646
Alba
30741
30867, 31597, 31602,
32855
Ambiance
Amstrad
Anthem
Aristona
ASDA
NEC
30741, 31602
Dyon
33052
30713
Onkyo
30503, 30627, 31612,
32147, 30571, 31634
eBench
Elfunk
31152
32820
Kendo
Kennex
Kenwood
Lenco
Lexicon
LG
30713
30713
Oppo
30575, 32545
30713
30539, 30646
32213
30713
30713
Elite
31152
Orion
30490, 30534
30713, 33052
32545
Emerson
EuroLine
Ferguson
Finlux
30675, 32213
30675
Ormond
Pacific
30713
Audix
30713
Autovox
Awa
30713
30713
Palladium
Panasonic
30713
32587
30741, 31602
33052
30741
30503, 30490, 31579,
31641, 32523, 32710,
32859
Basic Line
Bel Canto Design
Black Diamond
Blue Parade
Blue Sky
Brandt
30713
31571
Limit
Firstline
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
30713
Lodos
Loewe
30713
33052
30713
30539, 30741, 32474,
32783
Pelican Accessories
Philco
30533
30675
30675
30571
GE
30522
30713
Logik
30713
Philips
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31340,
31354, 32056, 32084,
32434, 32689
GFM
30675
30503
30713
31152
Lumatron
Lunatron
Luxman
Luxor
30741, 30713
30741
Global Sphere
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
31152
Bush
30741
C-Tech
30573
30741
Pioneer
30571, 30142, 30631,
31571, 32442, 32860
California Audio Labs 30490
30713
30713, 31152
30741
Cambridge Audio
Centrum
32808
Magnavox
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31354
Polk Audio
Presidian
ProAudio
Proscan
Proson
30539
30675, 30713
30627
30675
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
30713
Manhattan
Marantz
30713
Changhong
Cinetec
31394
30539, 30713
30713
30539, 32414, 32432,
33444
30713
30522
Clatronic
Clayton
30675
Mark
30713
30713
30713
Haaz
31152
30713
Matsui
Pye
30539, 30646
Hanseatic
30741
Crown
30713
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD
DVD
DVD
Blu-ray Disc
Sony
Radionette
Radiotone
RCA
30741
30713
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tamashi
Tandberg
Targa
30630, 30675
30675
Yamaha
30490, 30539, 30646,
30817, 31354, 32298,
32299
31516, 32180
30675
Sylvania
Toshiba
Vizio
30522, 30571, 32213,
32587
31394
32551, 32705, 33157
32563
Zenith
30503, 30741
30713
REC
30490
32213
31394
30713
30623
30741
30741
Yamaha
32298, 32299
Blu-ray Disc
Ambiance
Anthem
Red
Tchibo
TCL
30741
33052
Redstar
Roadstar
Rotel
DVD-R
Accurian
Aristona
Denon
32587
32820
30675
30646
30490
30675
30675
30741
30741
31664
30646
30646
31597
30741
30741
30646, 30675
30741
TCM
30741
Cambridge Audio
Denon
32808
Teac
30571, 30741, 30675,
31394
32258, 32748
33052
Salora
Samsung
Dyon
30490, 30573, 30199,
30820, 31635, 32069,
32329, 32489, 33195
Technica
Technics
Techwood
Teletech
30713
30490
30713
30713
30571
30522
Emerson
Funai
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
33052
30675
Go Video
GPX
Sanyo
30713
Harman/Kardon
Insignia
33228
Schneider
Schoentech
Scott
30539, 30646, 30713
30713
30675, 32428, 32596
Theta Digital
Thomson
Toshiba
Hitachi
Humax
Irradio
JVC
Integra
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
31394
30503, 31639, 32277,
32551, 32705, 33157
SEG
30713
JVC
32855
Semp
30503
Transonic
TVE
31394
LG
Lenco
33052
Sharp
30630, 30675, 30713,
32250, 32474, 32652,
32869
30713
Loewe
Magnavox
Medion
Panasonic
Lexicon
LG
32545
United
30675, 30713, 31152
30741, 30713
30503
30741, 31602
33052
Universum
Urban Concepts
Vestel
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Silva Schneider
SilverCrest
Skantic
30741, 33052
30533
Limit
30490, 31579, 32523,
32710, 32859
Loewe
Magnavox
Marantz
Momitsu
Onkyo
32474, 32783
30675
30713
30741
Victor
31597
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
30646, 31340
30631, 32860
30646
31152
32414, 32432, 33444
33052
Vizio
32563
30539, 30713
31152
Vtrek
32587
SM Electronic
Smart
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
Waltham
Wellington
Weltstar
Wharfedale
Windsor
Windy Sam
Xbox
30713
RCA
30522
30713
30713
Samsung
Schneider
Sharp
30490, 31635
30646
Sony
30533, 30864, 31033,
31070, 31431, 31516,
31633, 32180
30713
Oppo
32545
30713
Panasonic
Philips
31641, 32523, 32859
32084, 32434, 32689
30142, 32442
30199, 33195
32250, 32474, 32652
33052
30630, 30675, 32869
Soundwave
Star Clusters
Strato
30713
31152
31152
30713
31152
30713
Sony
31033, 31070, 31431,
31516, 31633, 32180
30573
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sylvania
Targa
30675
30522, 32083
31152
30741
Strong
XLogic
Toshiba
31639, 32277, 32551
Supervision
Sherwood
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD-R
Victor
TV/DVD Combination
31597
30646
30741
Magnavox
Matsui
12372
Yamaha
Zenith
11037, 30713
12719
Medion
Nordmende
Odys
12001
HD-DVD
Integra
LG
12719
32901, 33104 33504
30741
Panasonic
Philips
12170
11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
Microsoft
Onkyo
Xbox
32083
Powerpoint
Prosonic
Pvision
RCA
10698
32901, 33104 33504
32083
12001
12001
TV/DVD Combination
Akai
12746, 12932
12001
11675
Schaub Lorenz
SEG
Black Diamond
Blue Sky
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
11037, 12719, 30713
10818
Sharp
Bush
11037, 10698, 12719,
30713
Soniq
12493
Sunstech
Sylvania
12001
Centrum
Crown
DMTech
Dual
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
12001
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886, 30630, 30675
Teac
10698
11037, 30713
12049
Technica
Telefunken
Teletech
Thomson
Toshiba
United
11037, 30713
10698
Dynex
Elfunk
Emerson
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
10625
11394, 11864, 11886,
30675
11524
Ferguson
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
30713
11037, 30713
30713
Universum
Vestel
11037
30539
Viewsonic
Weltstar
12049
12001
11037, 30713
Hanseatic
Hitachi
Insignia
JVC
12001
11037, 11667, 30713
12049
12271
LG
11423
Logik
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
Luxor
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
MTX Audio Stereo Amplifier MXA4002 User Manual
Multi Tech Systems Network Card ISI5634UPCI User Manual
Mustang Survival Life Jacket MA7214 User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera 26495 User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 1280 User Manual
One for All Universal Remote URC 3445 User Manual
Oster Toaster 4831 User Manual
Palsonic TV Converter Box 3425G User Manual
Panasonic Headphones KX TD7580 User Manual
Panasonic Telephone KX TC1045ALW User Manual